Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Camera User Guide
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
•
•
•
Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety
Precautions” section, before using the camera.
•
•
Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
Playback Mode
ENGLISH
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
Wi-Fi Functions
Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera
properly.
Setting Menu
To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter
title at right.
9
10
11
Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
Accessories
From chapter title pages, you can access topics by
clicking their titles.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
©CANON INC. 2013
CDD-E515-010
1
Cover
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were
recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and
affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages
arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory
cards, that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be
recorded in a way that is machine readable.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
•
•
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Images recorded by the camera are intended for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that
even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other
legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial
settings.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
•
•
The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may
appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or
affect recorded images.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
•
•
The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before
using the camera.
9
10
11
Accessories
When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm.
This does not indicate damage.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Cover
Part Names and Conventions in This
Guide
•
•
•
Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets.
: Important information you should know
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
• =xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a
page number)
Basic Guide
•
•
Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still
images, movies, or both.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
Using GPS
Function
Still Images
:Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
viewing still images.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies
:Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
viewing movies.
Other Shooting
Modes
SX280 HS
Wi-Fi antenna area
Microphone
Lamp
P Mode
SX280 HS
Lens
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
GPS antenna
Flash
Speaker
Zoom lever
Shooting: <i(telephoto)> /
Playback Mode
<j(wide angle)>
Playback: <k(magnify)> /
<g(index)>
Power button
Tripod socket
DC coupler terminal cover
Memory card/battery cover
Strap mount
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Shutter button
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzTurning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
Contents: Basic
Operations
operations are also possible with the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
Basic Guide
•
•
In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
<o> Up button on back
<q> Left button on back
<5> Control dial on back
<p> Down button on back
<r> Right button on back
Using GPS
Function
Screen (LCD monitor)
Movie button
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
SX280 HS
AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
DIGITAL terminal
HDMITM terminal
Mode dial
•
•
The following icons are used to indicate functions that differ depending
on the camera model:
<b(Exposure compensation)> /
Other Shooting
Modes
<
(Wi-Fi)> / Up button
: Functions and precautions for the PowerShot SX280 HS only
: Functions and precautions for the PowerShot SX270 HS only
SX280 HS
SX270 HS
SX270 HS
P Mode
<b(Exposure compensation)> /
Up button
<1(Playback)> button
Control dial
This guide uses PowerShot SX280 HS illustrations and screenshots for
all explanations.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
<h(Flash)> / Right button
FUNC./SET button
<e(Macro)> / <f(Manual
focus)> / Left button
Playback Mode
<Q(Self-timer)> / <a(Single-
Indicator
<l(Display)> button
Wi-Fi Functions
image erase)> / Down button
<n> button
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Cover
5
8
Table of Contents
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
2
3
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table of Contents...........................6
Using GPS
Function
6
7
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
4
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
9
1
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Cover
Contents: Basic Operations
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Applying special effects
4
Shoot
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Vivid Colors
Poster Effect
Fish-Eye Effect
Shooting people well
Advanced Guide
I P
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Portraits
Against Snow
Using GPS
Function
Miniature Effect
Toy Camera Effect
Soft Focus
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Matching specific scenes
Other Shooting
Modes
Monochrome
P Mode
S t
Sports
Night Scenes
Under Water
Fireworks
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzFocus on faces......................................................................... 47, 71, 91
zzAdd a date stamp................................................................................. 56
zzUse Face ID................................................................................. 57, 104
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Cover
1
View
Safety Precautions
• Before using the product, please ensure that you read the safety
precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used
correctly.
• The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended
to prevent injuries to yourself and other persons, or damage to the
equipment.
• Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzOn a TV.............................................................................................. 158
zzOn a computer ..................................................................................... 22
zzErase images......................................................................................113
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
E
Shoot/View Movies
Using GPS
Function
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
Warning
zzShoot movies ................................................................................. 47, 80
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
• Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight.
In particular, remain at least 1 meter (39 inches) away from infants when
using the flash.
Other Shooting
Modes
c
Print
P Mode
zzPrint pictures...................................................................................... 162
• Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
Strap: Putting the strap around a child’s neck could result in asphyxiation.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Save
• Use only recommended power sources.
Playback Mode
• Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the product.
• Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
• To avoid the risk of injury, do not touch the interior of the product if
it has been dropped or otherwise damaged.
• Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke, a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
• Do not let the product come into contact with water (e.g. sea water)
or other liquids.
Wi-Fi Functions
SX280 HS
Use Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzShare images online .......................................................................... 127
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Cover
• Do not allow liquids or foreign objects to enter the camera.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
If liquids or foreign objects come into contact with the camera interior,
immediately turn the camera off and remove the battery.
If the battery charger becomes wet, unplug it from the outlet and consult
your camera retailer or a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Denotes the possibility of injury.
Caution
• When holding the camera by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
• Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
• Use only the recommended battery.
Advanced Guide
• Do not place the battery near or in direct flame.
• Unplug the power cord periodically, and using a dry cloth, wipe away
any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the
power outlet, and the surrounding area.
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the power cord or plug are damaged, or not fully plugged into the
outlet.
• Do not allow dirt or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
The battery may explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock or fire. This
could cause injury and damage the surroundings. In the event that a battery
leaks and the battery electrolyte contacts eyes, mouth, skin or clothing,
immediately flush with water.
• Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
• When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• Avoid using, placing or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty areas
These could cause leakage, overheating or an explosion of the battery,
resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns or other injuries.
High temperatures may cause deformation of the camera or battery charger
casing.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
• Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the camera in places where use of electronic devices is
restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
• Take care not to pinch your finger when the flash lowers.
This could result in injury.
Accessories
Appendix
SX280 HS
Index
• Do not play the supplied CD-ROM(s) in any CD player that does not
support data CD-ROMs.
It is possible to suffer hearing loss from listening with headphones to the
loud sounds of a CD-ROM played on an audio CD player (music player).
Additionally, this could damage the speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Cover
• Do not sit down with the camera in your pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
Denotes the possibility of damage to the equipment.
Caution
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Do not aim the camera at bright light sources (such as the sun on a
• When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do
not come into contact with the screen.
• Do not attach any hard objects to the camera.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
Contents: Basic
Operations
clear day).
Doing so may damage the image sensor.
Basic Guide
• When using the camera on a beach or at a windy location, be careful
not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
• Do not push down on the flash, or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• In regular use, small amounts of smoke may be emitted from the
flash.
This is due to the high intensity of the flash burning dust and foreign
materials stuck to the front of the unit. Please use a cotton swab to remove
dirt, dust or other foreign matter from the flash to prevent heat build-up and
damage to the unit.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• Remove and store the battery when you are not using the camera.
If the battery is left inside the camera, damage caused by leakage may
occur.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
• Before you discard the battery, cover the terminals with tape or other
insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
Wi-Fi Functions
• Unplug the battery charger from the power outlet after charging is
complete, or when you are not using it.
• Do not place anything, such as cloth, on top of the battery charger
while it is charging.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Do not place the battery near pets.
Pets biting the battery could cause leakage, overheating or explosion,
resulting in fire or damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Basic Guide
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Gives basic instructions, from initial preparations to
shooting, playback, and saving on a computer
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Initial Preparations...................13
Trying the Camera Out.............18
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Software, PDF Manuals
(on the included CD-ROM).....21
Appendix
Downloadable Software...........26
System Map ..............................30
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Cover
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
Charging the Battery
Before use, charge the battery with the included charger. Be sure to charge
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
the battery initially, because the camera is not sold with the battery charged.
Basic Guide
1 Insert the battery.
Attach the strap.
zzAfter aligning the marks on the battery
and charger, insert the battery by pushing
it in ( ) and down ( ).
zzThread the end of the strap through the
strap hole ( ), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end ( ).
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
2 Charge the battery.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzCB-2LY: Flip out the plug ( ) and plug
the charger into a power outlet ( ).
zzCB-2LYE: Plug the power cord into the
Other Shooting
Modes
Holding the Camera
CB-2LY
P Mode
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
zzPlace the strap around your wrist.
zzWhen shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If the flash is
up, do not rest your fingers on it.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
XXThe charging lamp turns orange and
charging begins.
Playback Mode
XXWhen charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
Wi-Fi Functions
CB-2LYE
Setting Menu
9
10
11
3 Remove the battery.
Accessories
zzAfter unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery by pushing it in (
and up ( ).
)
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Cover
Inserting the Battery and Memory Card
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• To protect the battery and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge
it continuously for more than 24 hours.
• For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the
charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction
or damage to the product.
Insert the included battery and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time
possible with a fully charged battery, see “Number of Shots/Recording Time,
• Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used.
Charge the battery on (or immediately before) the day of use.
• The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For
power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for
the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may
damage the battery.
1 Check the card’s write-protect
tab.
zzRecording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked (downward) position.
Slide the tab up until it clicks into the
unlocked position.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Open the cover.
P Mode
zzSlide the cover ( ) and open it ( ).
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
3 Insert the battery.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzWhile pressing the battery lock in the
direction of the arrow, insert the battery
as shown and push it in until it clicks into
the locked position.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
zzIf you insert the battery facing the wrong
way, it cannot be locked into the correct
position. Always confirm that the battery
is facing the right way and locks when
inserted.
Appendix
Index
Terminals
Battery
Lock
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Cover
4 Insert the memory card.
zzInsert the memory card facing as shown
until it clicks into the locked position.
zzMake sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Removing the Battery and Memory Card
Remove the battery.
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzOpen the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
Basic Guide
XXThe battery will pop up.
Advanced Guide
Terminals
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
5 Close the cover.
Remove the memory card.
zzPush the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
zzLower the cover ( ) and hold it down as
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed
position ( ).
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
XXThe memory card will pop up.
• For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
Cover
Setting the Date and Time
4 Finish the setup process.
zzPress the <m> button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
zzTo turn off the camera, press the power
button.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way
is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you
manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/Time]
screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify
the correct information.
1 Turn the camera on.
zzPress the power button.
XXThe [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
• To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [
] in step 2 and then
choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning the <5> dial.
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Set the date and time.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
P Mode
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to specify the date and time.
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
1 Access the camera menu.
zzPress the <n> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
3 Set the home time zone.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose your home time
zone.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Cover
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
2 Choose [Date/Time].
zzMove the zoom lever to choose the [3]
tab.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Date/Time], and
then press the <m> button.
1 Enter Playback mode.
Basic Guide
zzPress the <1> button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Access the setting screen.
zzPress and hold the <m> button, and
then immediately press the <n>
button.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Change the date and time.
settings.
Other Shooting
Modes
3 Set the display language.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose a language,
and then press the <m> button.
XXOnce the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
P Mode
zzPress the <n> button to close the
menu.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in
date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed.
• The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a
charged battery or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
• Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be
date and time.
Accessories
SX280 HS
Appendix
• The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the
<m> button before you press the <n> button. In this case, press the
Index
<
> button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2.
m
• You can also change the display language by pressing the <n> button
and choosing [Language ] on the [3] tab.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Cover
Movies
Trying the Camera OutStill Images
4 Shoot.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Shooting Still Images
Focus.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
zzPress the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
XXThe flash automatically rises in low-light
conditions.
Basic Guide
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Advanced Guide
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
1 Turn the camera on.
zzPress the power button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XXThe startup screen is displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
Shoot.
P Mode
2 Enter [
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down.
].
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
XXAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound is
played, and in low-light conditions when
the flash is up, it fires automatically.
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
XXIcons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
XXYour shot is only displayed until the
camera is ready to shoot again.
XXFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3 Compose the shot.
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward <j> (wide angle).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Cover
Viewing
Shooting Movies
Start shooting.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time.
XXBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
XXFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Basic Guide
1 Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the <1> button.
XXYour last shot is displayed.
Elapsed Time
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
2 Browse through your images.
zzTo view the previous image, press
the <q> button or turn the <5> dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the <r> button or turn the
<5> dial clockwise.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Finish shooting.
P Mode
zzPress the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
zzPress and hold the <q><r> buttons to
browse through images quickly.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
• You can make a short movie of the day (digest movie) just by shooting still
images. When the mode dial is set to [ ], the camera automatically records
a movie clip of the scene immediately before each shot (Hybrid Auto Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, turn the
5
5
<
<
> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the
> dial to browse through images.
Accessories
zzTo return to single-image display, press
the <m> button.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19
Cover
zzMovies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
] icon.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Erasing the Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Choose an image to erase.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image.
Advanced Guide
3 Play movies.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Erase the image.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [
]
Using GPS
Function
zzPress the <p> button.
(either press the <o><p> buttons or
turn the <5> dial), and then press the
<m> button again.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>
button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
XXPlayback now begins, and after the movie
is finished, [
] is displayed.
XXThe current image is now erased.
zzTo cancel erasure, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <5> dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the <m>
button.
P Mode
zzTo adjust the volume, press the <o><p>
buttons.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Cover
SX280 HS
PDF Manuals
Camera User Guide
zzRefer to this guide for a more in-depth understanding of camera
operation.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Software, PDF Manuals
(on the included CD-ROM)
The software and PDF manuals on the included DIGITAL CAMERA Solution
installation, and saving images to a computer.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Software Guide
zzRefer to this guide when using the software. The guide can be accessed
from the help system of software (some software excluded).
Advanced Guide
Software
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
After installing the software on the CD-ROM, you can do the following
things on your computer.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
CameraWindow
zzImport images and change camera settings
Other Shooting
Modes
ImageBrowser EX
zzManage images: view, search, and organize
zzPrint and edit images
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Auto Update Function
Using the software, you can update to the latest version, and download
new functions via the Internet (some software excluded). Be sure to install
the software on a computer with an Internet connection so you can use this
function.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
• Internet access is required to use this function, and any ISP account
Appendix
charges and access fees must be paid separately.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21
Cover
System Requirements
The software can be used on the following computers. Adobe Reader is
required to view the PDF manuals.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including
supported OS versions.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Windows
Macintosh
Installing the Software
Basic Guide
Windows 8
Windows 7 SP1
Windows Vista SP2
Windows XP SP3
Operating
System*1
Mac OS X 10.6
Mac OS X 10.7
Mac OS X 10.8*2
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
Using the software auto update function, you can update to the latest
version and download new functions via the Internet (some software
excluded), so be sure to install the software on a computer with an Internet
connection.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Computers running one of the above operating systems
(preinstalled), with an included USB port and Internet connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Computer
Processor
Using GPS
Function
Still images
What you will need:
zzComputer
Mac OS X 10.7 – 10.8:
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still images
Core 2 Duo or higher
1.6 GHz or higher
Mac OS X 10.6:
Movies
Other Shooting
Modes
Core Duo 1.83 GHz or higher
Core i7 2.8 GHz or higher*3
Movies
Core i7 2.8 GHz or higher*3
P Mode
Still images
1 Insert the CD-ROM in the
computer’s CD-ROM drive.
zzInsert the included CD-ROM (DIGITAL
computer’s CD-ROM drive.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Still images
Windows 8 (64 bit),
Mac OS X 10.7 – 10.8:
Windows 7 (64 bit): 2 GB or more
2 GB or more
Playback Mode
RAM
Windows 8 (32 bit),
Mac OS X 10.6: 1 GB or more
Windows 7 (32 bit),
Movies
Windows Vista: 1 GB or more
2 GB or more
Wi-Fi Functions
Windows XP: 512 MB or more
zzOn a Macintosh computer, after inserting
the disc, double-click the desktop disc
icon to open it, and then double-click the
Setting Menu
Interfaces
USB and Wi-Fi
9
10
11
Free Hard Disk
Space
440 MB or more*4
550 MB or more*4
Accessories
[
] icon displayed.
Display
1024 x 768 resolution or higher
Appendix
*1Wi-Fi image transfer to a computer requires Windows 8, Windows 7 SP1, Mac OS X
10.6.8, Mac OS X 10.7, or Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later.
*2Information on computer models compatible with Mac OS X 10.8 is available on the
Apple website.
Index
*3Recommended specifications for [
] movie playback in ImageBrowser EX.
*4Includes Silverlight 5.1 (max. 100 MB). Additionally, in Windows XP, Microsoft .NET
Framework 3.0 or later (max. 500 MB) must be installed. Installation may take some
time, depending on computer performance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Cover
2 Begin the installation.
zzClick [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
4 Install the files.
zzTurn the camera on, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
XXThe software will connect to the Internet
to update to the latest version and
download new functions. Installation may
take some time, depending on computer
performance and the Internet connection.
zzClick [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation and remove the CD-
ROM when the desktop is displayed.
zzTurn the camera off and disconnect the
cable.
Advanced Guide
3 When a message is displayed
prompting you to connect
the camera, connect it to a
computer.
zzWith the camera turned off, open the
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the
orientation shown, insert the plug fully
into the camera terminal ( ).
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• When not connected to the Internet, there are the following limitations.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
- The screen in step 3 will not be displayed.
- Some functions may not be installed.
Playback Mode
• The first time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will be installed,
so it may take a few minutes until camera images are accessible.
• If you have several cameras that were bundled with ImageBrowser EX on the
included CD-ROMs, be sure to use each camera with their included CD-ROM
and follow the on-screen installation instructions for each. Doing so will ensure
that each camera will receive the correct updates and new functions via the
auto update function.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzInsert the larger plug of the interface
cable in the computer’s USB port. For
details about USB connections on the
computer, refer to the computer user
manual.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23
Cover
Saving Images to a Computer
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
zzDouble click [
].
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
1 Connect the camera to the
computer.
zzFollow step 3 in “Installing the Software”
computer.
CameraWindow
Basic Guide
3 Save the images to the
computer.
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
XXImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAfter images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the <1> button
to turn the camera off, and unplug the
cable.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzOn a Macintosh computer,
CameraWindow is displayed when a
connection is established between the
camera and computer.
P Mode
zzFor instructions on viewing images on
a computer, refer to the Software Guide
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzFor Windows, follow the steps introduced
below.
Playback Mode
zzIn the screen that displays, click the [
link to modify the program.
]
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzChoose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera using Canon CameraWindow]
and then click [OK].
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Cover
Using the PDF Manuals
Camera User Guide
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the
taskbar.
• To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images
From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow] on the screen displayed
when you turn the camera on in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed,
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzAccess this guide by double-clicking the desktop shortcut icon.
Basic Guide
Software Guide
zzThe guide can be accessed from the help system of software (some
software excluded).
►
►
click the [Start] menu and choose [All Programs]
[Canon Utilities]
►
[CameraWindow]
[CameraWindow].
Advanced Guide
• On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click
the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop).
• Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations
apply.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• It may not be possible to install the PDF manuals on computers that do not
on a computer that supports Adobe Reader by copying the PDF files in the
Readme folder on the CD-ROM directly to a convenient location on the
computer.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until
camera images are accessible.
Other Shooting
Modes
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.
P Mode
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image
file sizes.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as
movie editing.
Wi-Fi Functions
SX280 HS
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Cover
SX270 HS
System Requirements
The software can be used on the following computers.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Downloadable Software
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Windows
Macintosh
Windows 8
Windows 7 SP1
Windows Vista SP2
Windows XP SP3
Operating
System
Mac OS X 10.6
Mac OS X 10.7
Mac OS X 10.8*1
Basic Guide
Software
Advanced Guide
Computers running one of the above operating systems
(preinstalled), with an included USB port and Internet connection
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it, you
can do the following things on your computer.
Computer
Processor
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Still images
Using GPS
Function
Mac OS X 10.7 – 10.8:
CameraWindow
zzImport images and change camera settings
Still images
Core 2 Duo or higher
1.6 GHz or higher
Mac OS X 10.6:
Movies
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Core Duo 1.83 GHz or higher
Core i7 2.8 GHz or higher*2
Movies
ImageBrowser EX
zzManage images: view, search, and organize
zzPrint and edit images
Other Shooting
Modes
Core i7 2.8 GHz or higher*2
Still images
P Mode
Still images
Windows 8 (64 bit),
Mac OS X 10.7 – 10.8:
Windows 7 (64 bit): 2 GB or more
2 GB or more
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
RAM
Windows 8 (32 bit),
Mac OS X 10.6: 1 GB or more
Windows 7 (32 bit),
Movies
access fees must be paid separately.
Playback Mode
Windows Vista: 1 GB or more
2 GB or more
Windows XP: 512 MB or more
Software Guide
Refer to this guide when using the software. The guide can be accessed
from the help system of software (some software excluded).
Wi-Fi Functions
Interfaces
USB
Free Hard Disk
Space
Setting Menu
440 MB or more*3
550 MB or more*3
9
10
11
Display
1024 x 768 resolution or higher
Accessories
*1Information on computer models compatible with Mac OS X 10.8 is available on the
Apple website.
Appendix
*2Recommended specifications for [
] movie playback in ImageBrowser EX.
Index
*3Includes Silverlight 5.1 (max. 100 MB). Additionally, in Windows XP, Microsoft .NET
Framework 3.0 or later (max. 500 MB) must be installed. Installation may take some
time, depending on computer performance.
• Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including
supported OS versions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Cover
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
3 When a message is displayed
prompting you to connect
the camera, connect it to a
computer.
zzWith the camera turned off, open the
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal ( ).
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
What you will need:
zzComputer
zzUSB cable (camera end: Mini-B)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1 Download the software.
zzWith a computer connected to the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAccess the site for your country or region.
zzDownload the software.
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Begin the installation.
zzOpen the downloaded file.
zzClick [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzInsert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
Cover
Saving Images to a Computer
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some
software excluded).
4 Install the files.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzTurn the camera on, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
XXThe software will connect to the Internet
to update to the latest version and
download new functions. Installation may
take some time, depending on computer
performance and the Internet connection.
zzClick [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
1 Connect the camera to the
computer.
zzFollow step 3 in “Installing the Software”
computer.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
2 Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTurn the camera off and disconnect the
cable.
Other Shooting
Modes
• Using the software, you can update to the latest version, and download new
functions via the Internet (some software excluded).
P Mode
zzOn a Macintosh computer,
CameraWindow is displayed when a
connection is established between the
camera and computer.
• The first time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will be installed,
so it may take a few minutes until camera images are accessible.
• Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera
model, if you have several cameras, you must use each camera to update to
its latest version of the software.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
zzFor Windows, follow the steps introduced
below.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzIn the screen that displays, click the [
link to modify the program.
]
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Cover
zzChoose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera using Canon CameraWindow]
and then click [OK].
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the
taskbar.
• To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images
From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow] on the screen displayed
when you turn the camera on in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed,
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
►
►
click the [Start] menu and choose [All Programs]
[Canon Utilities]
►
[CameraWindow]
[CameraWindow].
Advanced Guide
• On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click
the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop).
• Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations
apply.
Camera Basics
zzDouble click [
].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until
camera images are accessible.
CameraWindow
3 Save the images to the
computer.
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
XXImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Other Shooting
Modes
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.
P Mode
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image
file sizes.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as
movie editing.
zzAfter images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the <1> button
to turn the camera off, and unplug the
cable.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
zzFor instructions on viewing images on
a computer, refer to the Software Guide
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
29
Cover
SX270 HS
System Map
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Included Accessories
SX280 HS
Contents: Basic
Operations
Included Accessories
Basic Guide
Wrist Strap
WS-DC11
Battery Pack
NB-6L*1
Battery Charger
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE*1
Advanced Guide
Wrist Strap
WS-DC11
Battery Pack
NB-6L*1
Battery Charger
DIGITAL
CAMERA
Solution Disk
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE*1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Memory Card
Card Reader
Using GPS
Function
Windows/
Macintosh
Computer
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU*1
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*3
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Power
Cables
Other Shooting
Modes
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Memory Card
Card Reader
P Mode
Power
Windows/
Macintosh
Computer
TV/Video
System
Cables
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC40
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Playback Mode
Flash Unit
Case
Canon-brand PictBridge-
Compatible Printers
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC40
Wi-Fi Functions
TV/Video
System
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Waterproof Case
WP-DC49
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2*2
Flash Unit
Case
Canon-brand PictBridge-
Compatible Printers
Accessories
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
Appendix
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine
Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire,
etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage
and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you
may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.
Waterproof Case
WP-DC49
Index
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2*2
*1Also available for purchase separately.
*2High-Power Flash HF-DC1 also supported.
*3A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Advanced Guide
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Camera Basics
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Practical guide that introduces other camera basics and
describes shooting and playback options
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
On/Off........................................32
Shutter Button..........................33
Shooting Modes .......................33
Shooting Display Options .......34
FUNC. Menu..............................34
MENU Menu ..............................35
Indicator Display ......................36
Clock .........................................37
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
31
Cover
On/Off
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of
inactivity.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Shooting Mode
zzPress the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
zzTo turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Basic Guide
• You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if
Advanced Guide
SX280 HS
• Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to a computer
Camera Basics
Playback Mode
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SX270 HS
Using GPS
Function
• Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to a computer
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo turn the camera off, press the <1>
button again.
Other Shooting
Modes
• To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the <1> button.
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
• The lens will be retracted after about one minute, once the camera is in
Playback mode, and the flash will be lowered if it was up. You can turn the
camera off when the lens is retracted by pressing the <1> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
Appendix
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity.
In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself
off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Cover
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Shooting Modes
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Live View Control Mode
Customize image brightness or
P, Tv, Av, and M Modes
Take a variety of shots
using your preferred
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Auto Mode
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Movie Mode
For shooting movies
You can also shoot
movies when the mode
dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing
the movie button.
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Sports Mode
Shoot continuously as the camera
focuses on moving subjects
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Press all the way down. (From
the halfway position, press fully
to shoot.)
XXThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
Discreet Mode
P Mode
Shoot without the flash
or camera sounds
Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
• Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the
shutter button halfway.
• Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
Cover
Shooting Display Options
FUNC. Menu
Configure commonly used functions through the FUNC. menu as follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Press the <
l
> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
Contents: Basic
Operations
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen
.
Basic Guide
1 Access the FUNC. menu.
zzPress the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Information is displayed
No information is
displayed
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose a menu item.
• Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night display function
when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots
are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the
brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky
subject motion will not affect recorded images.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose a menu item, and
then press the <m> or <r> button.
zzIn some menu items, functions can be
specified simply by pressing the <m>
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
or <r> button, or another screen is
displayed for configuring the function.
Options
Playback Mode
Menu Items
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Choose an option.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an option.
Accessories
zzOptions labeled with a [
] icon can
Appendix
be configured by pressing the <l>
button.
Index
zzTo return to the menu items, press the
<q> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
Cover
4 Finish the setup process.
zzPress the <m> button.
XXThe screen before you pressed the
<m> button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you configured.
MENU Menu
Configure a variety of camera functions through other menus as follows.
Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [4],
playback [1], and so on. Note that available settings vary depending on
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
1 Access the menu.
Camera Basics
zzPress the <n> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose a tab.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzMove the zoom lever to choose a tab.
zzAfter you have pressed the <o><p>
buttons to choose a tab initially, you can
switch between tabs by pressing the
<q><r> buttons.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
Cover
3 Choose a setting.
Indicator Display
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose a setting.
Contents: Basic
Operations
depending on the camera status.
zzTo choose settings with options not
shown, first press the <m> or <r>
button to switch screens, and then either
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to select the setting.
zzTo return to the previous screen, press
the <n> button.
SX280 HS
Basic Guide
Indicator
Status
Color
Camera Status
Advanced Guide
On
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Green
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images,
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
SX270 HS
Other Shooting
Modes
4 Choose an option.
Indicator
Color
Camera Status
Status
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
P Mode
On
5 Finish the setup process.
zzPress the <n> button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
<n> button in step 1.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Green
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images, or
Blinking
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the
memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may
corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
• To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Cover
Clock
You can check the current time.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzPress and hold the <m> button.
XXThe current time appears.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzIf you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch
to vertical display. Press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <5> dial to change
the display color.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <m> button again to cancel
the clock display.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• When the camera is off, press and hold the <m> button, then press the power
button to display the clock.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2
SX280 HS
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Using GPS Function
Basic GPS operations and features
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Using GPS Function ................39
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Cover
Where to Use GPS, and How to Hold the
Camera
Using GPS Function
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Camera location information (latitude, longitude, and elevation) based on
signals acquired from GPS satellites can be added to the still images and
movies you shoot, or this information can be logged separately. In addition
to geotagging, the camera clock can be updated automatically.
Before using GPS functions, make sure the date, time, and home time zone
on the camera are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and Time”
Contents: Basic
Operations
GPS Antenna
zzUse the camera outside, where there is
an unobstructed view of the sky. (GPS
functions will not work correctly indoors or
in other areas away from GPS coverage
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
When using GPS functions, keep the following points in mind.
• In certain countries and regions, the use of GPS may be restricted.
Therefore, be sure to use GPS in accordance with the laws and
regulations of your country or region. Be particularly careful when
traveling outside your home country.
• Be careful about using GPS features where the operation of
electronic devices is restricted, because the camera will receive
GPS signals.
• Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images or GPS log files with others, as when posting images
online where many others can view them.
zzHold the camera correctly, as shown, for
easier GPS signal reception.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzKeep your fingers or other objects off the
GPS antenna.
Other Shooting
Modes
How to Carry the Camera When Using the Logger
Function
For better GPS signal reception, try to keep the GPS antenna pointing up,
toward the sky. When carrying the camera in a bag, put it in the bag with
the GPS antenna pointing up, and try to put the camera in an outer section
of bag.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• GPS: Global Positioning System
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
Cover
2 Check the reception status.
zzUse the camera outside, where there is
an unobstructed view of the sky. (GPS
functions will not work correctly indoors or
in other areas away from GPS coverage
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Places With Poor GPS Coverage
•
•
Location information may not be recorded, or inaccurate information may
be recorded where GPS signal coverage is poor, such as in the following
places.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
●
●
●
●
Indoors underground near buildings or in valleys in tunnels or
●
forests near high-voltage power lines or mobile phones operating on the
Advanced Guide
●
●
1.5 GHz band inside a bag or suitcase under water (when the camera
zzCheck GPS reception status as shown on
the screen.
●
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
●
great distances when traveling through different environments
Using GPS
Function
Even in other places, GPS satellite movement may interfere with
geotagging and cause missing or inaccurate location information, or the
information may indicate that the camera has been used elsewhere even
if it has not.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Reception Status Display
Time Required to Receive a GPS Signal
GPS signal reception may take longer after battery replacement, or when
you have not used GPS functions for some time.
P Mode
(on)
GPS signal received. Location can be recorded.*
•
•
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
(blinking)
(on)
Looking for GPS signal.*
No GPS signal.
You can shorten the time required to receive a GPS signal by using Wi-Fi
to store Assisted GPS data (information on the position of GPS satellites)
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Tips When [ ] is Displayed
9
10
11
Using GPS Function
•
•
When GPS signal reception is not possible indoors or in other places
going outside where there is an unobstructed view of the sky. Hold the
Accessories
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Appendix
Index
[
] will normally be displayed within a few minutes when the camera is
used in areas with ample GPS coverage, such as outdoor areas with an
unobstructed view of the sky. If [ ] is not displayed, move to an area
without obstructions (such as buildings) between the camera and GPS
satellites and wait a few minutes until it appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
Cover
Geotagging Images While Shooting
Logging Camera Location Data
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
The still images and movies you shoot can be geotagged, automatically
adding latitude, longitude, and elevation information. You can review the
and movies shown next to them.
You can keep a record of where the camera was taken by using location
information acquired from GPS satellite signals over a period of time. Daily
location and time data is logged to a file, separate from image data. Log files
you can use log files to follow the route taken with the camera on a map.
Note that the GPS logger will reduce battery life, because some power is
consumed even when the camera is off. Charge the battery as needed, or
keep a spare charged battery with you.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Activate GPS.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Using GPS
setting.
Using GPS
Function
1 Configure the setting.
Function” to choose [ ], press the
<l> button, and then choose [On]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <5> dial).
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Shoot.
zzThe still images and movies you shoot
are now geotagged, and you can review
the location information as described in
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
• In addition to geotagging your shots, you can also tag shots with the
Playback Mode
2 Finish the setup process.
zzWhen you press the <m> button, a
message about the logger is displayed.
Be sure to read the message.
Wi-Fi Functions
• Geotagging applies the initial camera location and shooting date and time, as
acquired when you begin shooting a movie.
shooting date and time as acquired for the first movie that day.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
XXThe [ ] icon shown with your shots
indicates the GPS reception status at that
XXThe logger function will operate, and the
date, time and location information based
on signals acquired from GPS satellites
will be logged to the camera.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzThe logger will continue to function even
when the camera is turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
Cover
3 Save the GPS log files to the
memory card.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Removing the battery after step 3 will deactivate the logger. To
reactivate the logger after battery replacement, turn the camera on
and then off again.
• Saving GPS log files is not possible when the memory card write-
protect tab is in the locked position. Make sure the tab is set to the
unlocked side.
• Location information, date and time will be saved to the memory
card when the camera is turned off or when displaying log files
remove the memory card when the logger is being used, turn the
camera on, then turn it off again before removing the memory card.
• When using the logger function, exercise caution when turning the
camera over to another person, as the date and time, and logged
location information will remain on the camera until it is saved to a
memory card (even if the battery is depleted).
zzWhen you turn off the camera, a
message about the logger is displayed.
The location information, date and
time will be saved to the memory card.
This information will not remain on the
camera.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzThe location information, date and time
will be saved to the memory card when
you do any of the following things.
-XDisplay the log files
-XDisplay the date/time setting screen
-XDisplay the time zone setting screen
zzIf the camera is off and you want to
remove the memory card when the logger
is being used, turn the camera on, then
turn it off again before removing the
memory card.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
GPS log file will also be erased.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Cover
3 Choose the log file to examine.
XXTo the right of today’s date, the time
elapsed from the last time location
information was recorded is displayed.
zzChoose the desired date and press the
<m> button. The recorded latitude,
longitude, time, and number of logs
acquired that day are displayed.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Checking the GPS Log Files
You can check the GPS log files saved to a memory card on the camera.
Contents: Basic
Operations
1 Access the [GPS Settings]
screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [GPS
Settings] on the [3] tab, and then press
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Number of Logs Acquired
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzTo return to the [GPS Settings] screen,
press the <n> button twice. When
you press the <n> button again,
a message about GPS and logging is
displayed. Press the <m> button after
reading the message.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Access the [Display Log Files]
screen.
zzChoose [Display Log Files], and then
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Latitude
Time
Longitude
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
43
Cover
Automatically Updating the Date and Time
Shortening the Time Required to Receive a
GPS Signal
You can shorten the time required to receive a GPS signal by saving
Assisted GPS (A-GPS) data (information on the position of GPS satellites)
to the memory card.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
150) automatically updated when the camera receives GPS signals.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
To obtain A-GPS data, Wi-Fi environment and settings are required
Advanced Guide
1 Set [GPS] to [On].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Using GPS
setting.
Because A-GPS data have a limited period of validity, the data should be
regularly updated.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [GPS
Auto Time] on the [3] tab, and then
zzTo set daylight saving time, follow the
steps in “Setting the Date and Time”
2 Access the [Assisted GPS]
Other Shooting
Modes
screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [GPS
Settings] on the [3] tab, and then press
zzChoose [Assisted GPS], and press the
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Confirming Automatic Time Updating
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Access the [Update A-GPS data]
screen.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Update A-GPS
data], and then press the <m> button.
After the date and time are automatically updated, [Update completed] is
shown on the [Date/Time] screen, accessed as described in “Changing the
has not been received yet.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
• When [GPS Auto Time] is set to [On], you cannot change the date
and time by accessing the [Date/Time] screen as described in
will be updated automatically.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
Cover
4 Update A-GPS data.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• When A-GPS data are stored on the memory card, you can check the date of
obtainment and period of validity of the existing data on the screen in step 4.
• To use acquired GPS satellite signals instead of any A-GPS data on the
memory card, choose [Off] for [Assisted GPS] in step 3.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzWhen you have not yet used Wi-Fi
functions, or you cannot connect to
an existing access point, the screen
for selecting an access point will
be displayed. Follow steps 2 – 4 in
“Connecting to Access Points in the List”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
5 Check the period of validity.
zzNote the period displayed on the screen,
and press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
• Because A-GPS data are saved to the memory card, you cannot
update A-GPS data when there is no card in the camera, or if the
card is locked. A-GPS data are also erased when you format the
memory card.
• A-GPS data are obtained from the Canon server. Please be aware
that Canon may cease providing this service without notice.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
3
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode/Hybrid Auto
Mode
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
Other Shooting
Modes
over shooting
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Shooting With Camera-
Determined Settings...............47
Image Customization
Features...................................63
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Common, Convenient
Features...................................53
Helpful Shooting Features ......65
Customizing Camera
Operation.................................66
Appendix
Using Face ID ...........................57
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
Cover
Still Images
Movies
3 Compose the shot.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Shooting With Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward <j> (wide angle). (A zoom bar
showing the zoom position is displayed.)
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Zoom Bar
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Camera Basics
Shooting (Smart Auto)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Focus Range (approx.)
1 Turn the camera on.
zzPress the power button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XXThe startup screen is displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
4 Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
Focus.
P Mode
2 Enter [
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
].
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
XXIcons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
XXFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
XXSeveral AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
XXThe flash automatically rises in low-light
conditions.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47
Cover
Shoot.
Resize the subject and
recompose the shot as needed.
zzTo resize the subject, repeat the
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded, and movies
shot at zoom factors shown in blue will
look grainy.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down.
Contents: Basic
Operations
XXAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound is
played, and in low-light conditions when
the flash is up, it fires automatically.
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzWhen you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
XXYour shot is only displayed until the
camera is ready to shoot again.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting Movies
Start shooting.
Finish shooting.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
zzPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time.
XXBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
XXFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
P Mode
Elapsed Time
XXRecording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
Cover
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
You can make a short movie of the day (digest movie). Just by shooting
still images, the camera will automatically record a movie clip of the scene
immediately before each shot.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Although the digest movie recorded on a particular day constitutes a single file,
a single clip (chapter) is created with each shot.
• Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if
they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
- If the digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB or the total recording
time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20 seconds
1 Enter [ ] mode.
Advanced Guide
been changed
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].
XXThe flash automatically rises.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Shoot.
Digest Movie Playback
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
zzTo beautifully capture a digest movie,
which is created by automatically
recording about 2 – 4 seconds of the
scene before each shot, aim the camera
at the subject about four seconds before
shooting a still image.
You can play digest movies either by viewing still images shot in [ ] mode
on the same day as the movies or by specifying the date of movies to play
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Still Images/Movies
• If the camera is turned on while the <l> button is held down,
the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press
the <n> button and choose [Mute] on the [3] tab, and then
press the <q><r> buttons to choose [Off].
• The camera makes a slight noise if shaken, but this is the sound of
the lens moving and does not indicate mechanical damage.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzSome camera sounds will be muted.
Sounds are not played when you press
the shutter button halfway, or trigger the
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
• Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
] mode, because
Appendix
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
• A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
Index
• Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Movies
Contents: Basic
Operations
• A flashing [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred
by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
• If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the
• The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when
you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing
• To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
• A blinking [h] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates
that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging.
Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press
the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press
it again.
• The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies
Microphone
• Keep your fingers away from the
microphone while shooting movies.
Blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause
the recording to sound muffled.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
• Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
• Once movie recording begins, a smaller image display area is
shown, with the subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting
distortion such as rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the
same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• Audio is recorded in stereo.
• Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced.
However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when
there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, press the <n> button,
Playback Mode
• Restart the camera if the message [Wrong flash position. Restart
the camera] displayed, which indicates that your finger or some
other object is obstructing the movement of the flash.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
Cover
• When shooting movies, only People, Other Subjects, and At Close Range icons will
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
be displayed.
Scene Icons
• When shooting with the self-timer, People (In Motion), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), Children, Other Subjects (In Motion) icons will not be
displayed.
Contents: Basic
Operations
In [
] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will not be displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• If the flash is set to [ ], the Backlit icons for Smiling and Children will not be
displayed.
Background
Normal Backlit
Dark*
Sunsets Spotlights
Subject
People
Camera Basics
• Babies, Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will be displayed
when [Face ID] is set to [On], and the face of a registered baby (under two years old)
• When shooting in [ ] mode, only People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and At
Close Range icons will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
Using GPS
Function
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
In Motion
Shadows on Face
Smiling
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
Other Shooting
Modes
Sleeping
actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your
expected effect, color, or brightness.
P Mode
Babies
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Smiling
Sleeping
Playback Mode
Children (In Motion)
Other Subjects
In Motion
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
–
–
–
–
–
9
10
11
At Close Range
Accessories
* Tripod Used
Appendix
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
Index
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
• The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue, and the
background color of [ ] is orange.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
51
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
Continuous Shooting Scenes
Image Stabilization Icons
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
and Legal Information
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images: [ ], [ ], or [W].
Contents: Basic
Operations
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in
[
] and [ ] modes.
Basic Guide
Image stabilization for movies,
reducing strong camera shake,
as when shooting while walking
(Dynamic IS)
Advanced Guide
Image stabilization for still
images
:
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Smiling (including Babies)
Sleeping (including Babies)
Children
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Image stabilization for slow
camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto
(Powered IS)
Using GPS
Function
Image stabilization for still
images, when panning*
:
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF assist beam will not light up, the flash will
not fire, and the shutter sound will not be played.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
No image stabilization, because
the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other
means. However, some shooting
conditions will activate image
stabilization.
Other Shooting
Modes
Image stabilization for macro
shots (Hybrid IS)
W: So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow
subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera
shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving
vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.
Playback Mode
• In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
• Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
IS icon is not displayed.
• When you want to shoot single images only, press the <m> button, choose
[
] in the menu, and then select [ ].
Accessories
• In [ ] mode, no [
] icon is displayed.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Common, Convenient Features
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
Contents: Basic
Operations
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
subjects you are aiming the camera at.
Basic Guide
•
•
A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus.
use digital zoom for up to about 80x enlargement.
Advanced Guide
1 Move the zoom lever toward
<i>.
zzHold the lever until zooming stops.
XXZooming stops at the largest possible
zoom factor (before the image becomes
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
on the screen.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame
will remain on the screen.
Using GPS
Function
When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and
image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
P Mode
Zoom Factor
2 Move the zoom lever toward
<i> again.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
XXThe camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
53
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
• Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending
on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear
grainy.
Using the Self-Timer
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed
shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter
button.
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably
grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.
Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
following step 1.
• Zoomed images may look grainy under some resolution settings
in blue.
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <p> button, choose []] (either
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XXOnce the setting is complete, []] is
displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• Focal length when optical and digital zoom are combined is as follows (35mm
film equivalent).
25 – 2000 mm (25 – 500 mm with optical zoom alone)
• To deactivate digital zoom, press the <n> button, choose [Digital Zoom]
on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off].
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Cover
2 Shoot.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Movies
zzFor Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Customizing the Self-Timer
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
zzFor Movies: Press the movie button.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [$].
XXOnce you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
Advanced Guide
zzFollowing step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
<n> button immediately.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
XXTwo seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
zzTo cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
Using GPS
Function
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Delay] or [Shots].
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose a value, and then
press the <m> button.
zzTo restore the original setting, choose
P Mode
[
] in step 1.
XXOnce the setting is complete, [$] is
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
displayed.
Still Images
Movies
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
Playback Mode
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Wi-Fi Functions
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have
pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing
the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
Setting Menu
• For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
9
10
11
Accessories
Configure the setting.
zzFollow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
XXOnce the setting is complete, [[] is
displayed.
• When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are
determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the
flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop
automatically when the memory card becomes full.
• When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the
shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Appendix
Index
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Deactivating the Flash
Prepare the camera for shooting without the flash as follows.
Adding a Date Stamp
Contents: Basic
Operations
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner.
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm
Basic Guide
Configure the setting.
zzPress the <r> button, choose [!] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Date
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stamp
] on the [4] tab, and then
Using GPS
Function
XXOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
XXIf the flash is already up, it will be lowered
automatically.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XXOnce the setting is complete, [!] is
displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• If a flashing [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button
halfway in low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Playback Mode
2 Shoot.
XXAs you take shots, the camera adds the
shooting date or time to the lower-right
corner of images.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzTo restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
Accessories
Appendix
• Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Cover
Using Face ID
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows.
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may
cause it to be printed twice.
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
Contents: Basic
Operations
- Use the software to print
).
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based
,
Basic Guide
on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Personal Information
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
•
Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID,
and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera.
Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be
recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful
when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting
images online where many others can view them.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names,
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, name, birthday) for up to 12 people
Wi-Fi Functions
to use with Face ID.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [4] tab, and then
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
57
Cover
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Add to Registry],
and then press the <m> button.
3 Register the person’s name and
birthday.
zzPress the <m> button.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose a character,
and then press the <m> button to enter
it.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Add a New Face],
and then press the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzUp to 10 characters can be used.
zzChoose [ ] or [ ] and press the <m>
button to move the cursor.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzChoose [ ] and press the <m> button.
The previous character will be deleted.
zzPress the <n> button to return to the
[Edit Profile] screen.
2 Register face information.
zzAim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
zzA white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
zzTo register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <5>
dial), and then press the <m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose a
setting.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzIf the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
Accessories
Appendix
zzAfter [Register?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to specify the date.
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.
Index
XXThe [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
Cover
Shooting
4 Save the settings.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Save], and then
press the <m> button.
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person
as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that
person when shooting.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
zzAfter a message is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the <m>
button.
XXWhen you point the camera toward a
subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 Continue registering face
Using GPS
Function
information.
zzShoot.
zzTo register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
XXDisplayed names will be recorded in still
images. Even if people are detected, but
their names are not displayed, the names
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the
image.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as
the registered person if they share similar facial features.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• The flash will not fire when following step 2.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
• You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
59
Cover
Checking and Editing Registered Information
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or
scene differs drastically from the registered face information.
• If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered
information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will
allow for easier detection of registered faces.
• If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue
shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during
• Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow, you should
be recorded in the image.
• If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID
Settings] on the [4] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].
• You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple
• In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, but they will
be recorded in still images.
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info]
Contents: Basic
Operations
screen.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Edit Info] and press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
Using GPS
Function
2 Choose a person to check or
edit.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose the person
to check or edit, and then press the <m>
button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M
3 Check or edit the information as 6
Mode
needed.
Playback Mode
7
zzTo check a name or birthday, access
the [Edit Profile] screen by pressing the
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
8
9
10
11
<o><p> buttons or turning the <5>
dial and then pressing the <m> button.
On the screen displayed, you can edit
names or birthdays as described in step
3 of “Registering Face ID Information”
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
Cover
zzTo check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then
press the <m> button. On the screen
displayed, choose face information to
erase by pressing the <o><p><q><r>
buttons and then the <m> button. After
[Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
filled.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Access the [Add Face Info]
screen.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Info] and press the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
• Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• You can use the software to edit registered names. Some characters entered
with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded
in images.
2 Choose the name of the person
to overwrite.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose the name of
a person to overwrite, and then press the
<m> button.
zzA message is displayed if you have
already registered five faces. In this case,
choose [OK] (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
zzIf less than five faces are registered, go
to step 4 to add face information.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
61
Cover
3 Choose the face info to
overwrite.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose the face info
to overwrite, and then press the <m>
button.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, name, birthday) registered to Face ID.
However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.
zzFollow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Info].
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
4 Register face information.
zzFollow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
register the new face information.
zzRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose the name
of a person to erase, and then press the
<m> button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
• You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled. Follow the
steps above to overwrite face information.
• You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least
one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Instead
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
• If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
Cover
Still Images
Image Customization Features
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Configure the setting.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
XXThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Configure the setting.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
XXOnce the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper
Size (for 4:3 Images)
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or
Wi-Fi Functions
postcard sizes.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
zz[ ]: For e-mailing images.
Setting Menu
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display on standard-
definition televisions or similar display devices, or for printing images at 3.5 x
5-inch or A-series sizes.
9
10
11
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5
– 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
Accessories
5 x 7 in.
Postcard
3.5 x 5 in.
Square aspect ratio.
Appendix
Index
• Not available in [ ] mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
63
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Red-Eye Correction
Red-eye that occurs in the flash photography can be automatically
Changing Movie Image Quality
Contents: Basic
Operations
3 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card,
corrected as follows.
Basic Guide
1 Access the [Flash Settings]
screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
Advanced Guide
Configure the setting.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [
in the menu, and choose the desired
XXThe option you configured is now
displayed.
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
2 Configure the setting.
zzChoose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then
XXOnce the setting is complete, [R] is
displayed.
Image
Quality
Playback Mode
Resolution
1920 x 1080*
Frame Rate
Details
Wi-Fi Functions
For shooting in Full HD
For shooting in HD
30 fps
30 fps
1280 x 720
640 x 480
Setting Menu
9
10
11
For shooting in standard
definition
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
30 fps
Accessories
* Fine Detail Movie Processing (This function quickly processes a large amount of
information, making it possible to record even finer details in movies.)
Appendix
•
Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes (if
the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for example).
Index
• In [
edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded.
], and [
] modes, black bars displayed on the top and bottom
• You can also access the screen in step 2 by pressing the <r> button and then
the <n> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
Cover
Still Images
Helpful Shooting Features
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
Contents: Basic
Operations
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
Displaying Grid Lines
Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
Basic Guide
reference while shooting.
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then
Advanced Guide
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Grid
Lines] on the [4] tab, and then choose
XXOnce the setting is complete, grid lines
are displayed on the screen.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
2 Check the focus.
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnified.
Playback Mode
• Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzTo restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
9
10
11
Accessories
• The area in focus will not be magnified when you press the shutter
button halfway if a face was not detected, if the person is too close
to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement.
Appendix
Index
• Not available in [ ] mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
65
Cover
Still Images
Customizing Camera Operation
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Checking for Closed Eyes
Contents: Basic
Operations
[
] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
Still Images
Basic Guide
Deactivating the AF Assist Beam
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when
you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the [4] tab, and then
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
2 Shoot.
Configure the setting.
zz[ ] flashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
zzTo restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [4] tab, and then
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Still Images
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-
• When you have specified multiple shots in [$] mode, this function is only
available for the final shot.
• A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have
• This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ] mode
Playback Mode
eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
1 Access the [Flash Settings]
screen.
9
10
11
Accessories
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
Appendix
m
Index
2 Configure the setting.
zzChoose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
Cover
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Changing the Screen Displayed After Shots
Changing the Image Display Style After Shots
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
Contents: Basic
Operations
displayed immediately after shooting.
1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
Basic Guide
Changing the Image Display Period After Shots
Advanced Guide
1 Access the [Review image after
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <5> dial to choose [Display Info].
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose the
desired option.
Camera Basics
shooting] screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Display Time].
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose the
desired option.
Off
Displays only the image.
P Mode
Detailed
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
[Off] and cannot be changed.
• By pressing the <l> button while an image is displayed after shooting,
you can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info]
on the [4] tab cannot be changed. By pressing the <m> button, you can do
the following operations.
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Wi-Fi Functions
Quick
Displays images only until you can shoot again.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
2 sec., 4 sec., Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed,
8 sec.
Hold
Off
you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway.
No image display after shots.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
67
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Other Shooting Modes
Using GPS
Function
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take
shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured
using special functions
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Brightness/Color Customization
(Live View Control) .................69
Image Effects
(Creative Filters) .....................73
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Discreet Mode...........................69
Moving Subjects (Sports)........70
Specific Scenes........................71
Special Modes for Other
Purposes .................................77
Appendix
Shooting Various Movies ........80
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
Cover
Still Images
Brightness/Color Customization
(Live View Control)
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Discreet Mode
Contents: Basic
Operations
Shoot without activating camera sounds, the flash, or lamp as follows. Use
this mode where camera sounds, the flash, and lights are prohibited.
Image brightness or colors when shooting can be easily customized as
follows.
Basic Guide
1 Enter [ ] mode.
Advanced Guide
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].
1 Enter [
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
].
Using GPS
Function
2 Shoot.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
• In [ ] mode, even playback sounds are muted. Sounds of camera operations
are muted, and movie audio is also muted.
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <m> button to access the
setting screen. Press the <o><p>
buttons to choose a setting item, and
then press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <5> dial to adjust the value as you
watch the screen.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
zzPress the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Shoot.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
For brighter images, adjust the level to the right, and for darker
images, adjust it to the left.
Brightness
Color
Accessories
For more vivid images, adjust the level to the right, and for more
subdued images, adjust it to the left.
Appendix
For a warm, reddish tone, adjust the level to the right, and for a cool,
bluish tone, adjust it to the left.
Tone
Index
• Regardless of any brightness adjustment in this setting, movies will
be recorded with optimal image brightness.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
69
Cover
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Images Displayed During Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group, and
only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that the
Moving Subjects (Sports)
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.
Contents: Basic
Operations
image is part of a group, [
] is displayed in the upper left of the screen.
Basic Guide
1 Enter [ ] mode.
also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image
temporarily ungrouped.
Using GPS
Function
2 Focus.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzWhile you are pressing the shutter button
halfway, the camera will continue to
adjust focus and image brightness where
the blue frame is displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
3 Shoot.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzHold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
Playback Mode
zzShooting stops when you release the
shutter button or reach the maximum
number of shots, after which [Busy] is
displayed and the shots are shown in the
order you took them.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
increased to suit the shooting conditions.
• There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can shoot again.
Note that some types of memory cards may delay your next shot even longer.
SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.
• Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings,
and the zoom position.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
Cover
Specific Scenes
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
Shoot evening scenes without
using a tripod (Handheld
NightScene)
zzBeautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
zzA single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Contents: Basic
Operations
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
Basic Guide
1 Enter [K] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [K].
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
2 Choose a shooting mode.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [I] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting
Modes
ꢀSShoot underwater (Underwater)
zzNatural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
zzThis mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating filter
3 Shoot.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Still Images
Movies
Playback Mode
IShoot portraits (Portrait)
zzTake shots of people with a softening
effect.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Still Images
Movies
Accessories
PShoot with snowy backgrounds
(Snow)
zzBright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
71
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
tShoot fireworks (Fireworks)
zzVivid shots of fireworks.
Shooting With an Underwater Focusing Range
Contents: Basic
Operations
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
zzPress the <q> button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
• Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
• Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
• In [ ] mode, excessive camera shake or certain shooting
conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
• In [t] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to hold the
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Shoot.
P Mode
Focusing Range
Description
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Underwater
Macro
Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for even closer
shots.
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting opportunities
when shooting subjects some distance away. Especially effective
for moving subjects.
Playback Mode
] mode instead
8
f
Quick
Wi-Fi Functions
Manual Focus
Setting Menu
9
10
11
range.
Accessories
• In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
• In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
• In [8] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In this
case, try setting the focus range to [ ].
Appendix
Index
• [
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
Cover
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Movies
Contents: Basic
Operations
Correcting White Balance
adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color-
compensating filter.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
Basic Guide
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].
Advanced Guide
1 Choose [S].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Using GPS
Function
2 Choose a shooting mode.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose a shooting
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose white balance.
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose
Other Shooting
Modes
[
] in the menu.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
3 Shoot.
Still Images
Movies
Playback Mode
3 Adjust the setting.
zzMove the zoom lever to adjust the
correction level for B and A, and then
press the <m> button.
XXOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Shoot in vivid colors
(Super Vivid)
zzShots in rich, vivid colors.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
• The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you
switch to another white balance option in step 2, but correction
levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data.
Index
• B represents blue and A, amber.
• White balance can also be manually corrected by recording custom white
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
73
Cover
Still Images
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Movies
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Movies
Contents: Basic
Operations
Posterized shots (Poster Effect)
zzShots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and
below your selected area.
Basic Guide
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure
you obtain the desired results.
Using GPS
Function
1 Choose [ ].
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-eye Effect)
Other Shooting
Modes
XXA white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
P Mode
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
2 Choose the area to keep in
focus.
zzPress the <l> button.
zzMove the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and press the <o><p> buttons to move
it.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
1 Choose [ ].
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Choose an effect level.
zzPress the <l> button, choose an
effect level (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then
press the <l> button again.
XXA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
3 For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose the speed by pressing the
<q><r> buttons or turning the <5>
dial.
Appendix
Index
3 Shoot.
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
results.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
Cover
Still Images
4 Return to the shooting screen
and shoot.
zzPress the <n> button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Contents: Basic
Operations
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
Basic Guide
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Advanced Guide
1 Choose [ ].
Speed
Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
2 Choose a color tone.
zzPress the <l> button, choose a color
tone (either press the <q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial), and then press the
<l> button again.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the
zoom before shooting.
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
P Mode
XXA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
results.
3 Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Playback Mode
• To switch the orientation of the frame (from horizontal to vertical or vice-versa),
press the <m> button in step 2. You can move the frame in vertical orientation
by pressing the <q><r> buttons.
Wi-Fi Functions
Warm
Cool
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
results.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
75
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Shooting With a Soft Focus Effect
Shooting in Monochrome
Contents: Basic
Operations
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter is attached
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [ ].
1 Choose [ ].
Advanced Guide
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose a color tone.
zzPress the <l> button, choose a color
tone (either press the <q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial), and then press the
<l> button again.
Using GPS
Function
2 Choose an effect level.
zzPress the <l> button, choose an
effect level (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then
press the <l> button again.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
XXA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
XXA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
P Mode
3 Shoot.
Black and white shots.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
B/W
3 Shoot.
Sepia
Blue
Sepia tone shots.
Playback Mode
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
Blue and white shots.
results.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
Cover
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
• The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and
open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible.
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Auto Shooting After Face Detection
(Smart Shutter)
[
Basic Guide
Still Images
Advanced Guide
Auto Shooting After Smile Detection
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
Camera Basics
Using the Wink Self-Timer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down.
The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
Using GPS
Function
1 Choose [ ].
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
press the <l> button.
1 Choose [ ].
Other Shooting
Modes
press the <l> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <l> button.
2 Compose the shot and press
the shutter button halfway.
zzMake sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <l> button.
XXThe camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Aim the camera at a person.
zzEach time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
zzTo pause smile detection, press the <p>
button. Press the <p> button again to
resume detection.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
3 Press the shutter button all the
way down.
XXThe camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
Appendix
Index
• Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will
continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
XXThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
77
Cover
4 Face the camera and wink.
XXThe camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
zzTo cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Using the Face Self-Timer
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
shots.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [ ].
• If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
Using GPS
Function
• Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses.
• Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.
• If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
press the <l> button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <l> button.
2 Compose the shot and press
the shutter button halfway.
zzMake sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
Other Shooting
Modes
[
• If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way
down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Press the shutter button all the
way down.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
XXThe camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
XXThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
Cover
Still Images
4 Join the subjects in the
shooting area and look at the
camera.
XXAfter the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
High-Speed Continuous Shooting
(High-speed Burst HQ)
Contents: Basic
Operations
You can shoot a series of shots in rapid succession by holding the shutter
button all the way down. For details on the continuous shooting speed, see
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
HQ: High Quality
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzTo cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
1 Choose [ ].
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Shoot.
• Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area,
the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
Other Shooting
Modes
XXHold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
P Mode
[
zzShooting stops when you release the
shutter button or reach the maximum
number of shots, after which [Busy] is
displayed and the shots are shown in the
order you took them.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
XXEach set of images shot continuously is
managed as a single group, and only the
first image in that group will be displayed
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
• Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot.
• The screen is blank while you are shooting.
Appendix
• There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can shoot again.
Note that some types of memory cards may delay your next shot even longer.
SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.
• Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings,
and the zoom position.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
79
Cover
Movies
Movies
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Movies
Shooting Various Movies
Contents: Basic
Operations
Shooting Movies with Smoother Motion
Shoot movies with smoother motion, at nearly double the frame rate, as
follows.
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode
Basic Guide
1 Enter [E] mode.
Advanced Guide
zzSet the mode dial to [E].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
XXBlack bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
[
].
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Movies
3 Shoot.
P Mode
zzPress the movie button.
zzTo stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Locking or Changing Image Brightness Before Shooting
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop
increments within a range of –2 to +2.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
1 Lock the exposure.
zzPress the <o> button to lock the
exposure. The exposure shift bar is
displayed.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzTo unlock the exposure, press the <o>
button again.
Accessories
Appendix
2 Adjust the exposure.
zzTurn the <5> dial to adjust the
exposure, as you watch the screen.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
Cover
Movies
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the
zoom lever.
• Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the
movie button.
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies
Contents: Basic
Operations
You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note
that sound is not recorded.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [ ].
26) on a computer.
Advanced Guide
zzSet the mode dial to [E].
zzPress the <m> button, choose [E]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
in the menu, and then choose [
]
Using GPS
Function
2 Choose a frame rate.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired frame
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
XXThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
XXA bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed. Maximum clip length is approx.
30 sec.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Playback Time (For a 30-
Frame Rate
Image Quality
sec. Clip)
Index
Approx. 4 min.
Approx. 2 min.
240 fps
120 fps
(320 x 240)
(640 x 480)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
81
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
5
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P Mode
Using GPS
Function
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
•
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set
Wi-Fi Functions
to [G] mode.
•
•
[G]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting in Program AE
([P] Mode) ................................83
Shooting Range and
Focusing..................................89
Index
Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation).....83
Flash..........................................93
Other Settings ..........................95
Color and Continuous
Shooting ..................................86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Image Brightness
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
(Exposure Compensation)
Contents: Basic
Operations
Still Images
Basic Guide
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –2 to +2.
1 Enter [G] mode.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
zzPress the <o> button. As you watch the
screen, press the <q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to adjust brightness,
and then press the <o> button again
when finished.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button
halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this
• Movies can be recorded in [G] mode as well, by pressing the movie button.
However, some <H> and <n> settings may be automatically
adjusted for movie recording.
P Mode
XXThe correction level you specified is now
displayed.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
83
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Changing the Metering Method
Locking Image Brightness/Exposure
(AE Lock)
Contents: Basic
Operations
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
Basic Guide
exposure separately.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
XXThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Advanced Guide
1 Lock the exposure.
Camera Basics
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
<o> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XX[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
Other Shooting
Modes
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots.
Evaluative
Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions.
zzTo unlock AE, release the shutter button
and press the <o> button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
zzAfter one shot, AE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
Determines the average brightness of light across the entire
image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area
as more important.
P Mode
Center
Weighted Avg.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame),
Spot
Playback Mode
displayed in the center of the screen.
Wi-Fi Functions
• AE: Auto Exposure
Setting Menu
• After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed
and aperture value by turning the <5> dial (Program Shift).
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Changing the ISO Speed
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Contents: Basic
Operations
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast can also be automatically
corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
Basic Guide
XXThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[i-Contrast] on the [4] tab, and then
XXOnce the setting is complete, [@] is
displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the
shooting mode and conditions.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Other Shooting
Modes
Low
For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at
twilight.
• Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
P Mode
High
For shooting night scenes, or in dark
rooms.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
• To view the automatically set ISO speed when the camera is set to [ ], press
the shutter button halfway.
Wi-Fi Functions
• Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there
may be a greater risk of subject blurriness in some shooting conditions.
• Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce
subject blurriness and increase the flash range. However, shots may look
grainy.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
85
Cover
Color and Continuous Shooting
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Contents: Basic
Operations
Custom White Balance
Adjusting White Balance
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
Basic Guide
natural for the scene you are shooting.
Advanced Guide
zzFollow the steps in “Adjusting White
zzAim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the <l> button.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
XXThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XXThe tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
Other Shooting
Modes
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting
P Mode
Auto
• Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
conditions.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Day Light
Cloudy
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, or at twilight.
Playback Mode
For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungsten) lighting
and similarly colored fluorescent lighting.
Tungsten
Wi-Fi Functions
For shooting under warm-white (or similarly colored) or cool-
white fluorescent lighting.
Fluorescent
Fluorescent H
Setting Menu
9
10
11
For shooting under daylight fluorescent and similarly colored
fluorescent lighting.
Accessories
Sets the optimal white balance for shooting underwater. Tones
down blues to produce natural-looking colors overall.
Appendix
Underwater
Custom
S
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
and Legal Information
• With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may
be modified. These settings may not produce the expected results
with some skin tones.
Contents: Basic
Operations
or black and white.
Basic Guide
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
XXThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
Custom Color
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Access the setting screen.
zzFollow the steps in “Changing Image
choose [ ], and then press the <l>
button.
Other Shooting
Modes
My Colors Off
Vivid
–
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images sharper.
Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued images.
Creates sepia tone images.
P Mode
Neutral
Sepia
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
an option, and then specify the value by
pressing the <q><r> buttons or turning
the <5> dial.
zzFor stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
B/W
Creates black and white images.
Playback Mode
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid
Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling
images on positive film.
Wi-Fi Functions
Positive Film
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Accessories
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and other
blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Blue
Appendix
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, and
other green subjects more vivid.
zzPress the <l> button to complete the
setting.
Index
Vivid Green
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid.
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other
Custom Color
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
87
Cover
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
Continuous Shooting
Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
• As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
• Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
XXThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
fixed to the location where it is displayed in the first shot. Even if the subject
moves, the name will stay fixed in the same position for any subsequent shots.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Shoot.
XXHold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
P Mode
Mode
Description
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Continuous shooting, with the focus and exposure determined
when you press the shutter button halfway.
Continuous
W
Playback Mode
Continuous
Shooting AF
Continuous shooting and focusing.
[AF Frame] is set to [Center] and cannot be changed.
Wi-Fi Functions
Continuous shooting, with the focus fixed at the position
determined in manual focusing. In [t] mode, focus is determined
by the first shot.
Continuous
Shooting LV*
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Shooting Range and Focusing
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway
to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position
you specified. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range”
Shooting Close-ups (Macro)
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [e]. For
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <q> button, choose [e] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [f].
Using GPS
Function
zzPress the <q> button, choose [f]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <5> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XXOnce the setting is complete, [e] is
displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
XX[f] and the MF indicator are displayed.
P Mode
• If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
• Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.
• In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, [e] will turn gray
and the camera will not focus.
2 Specify the general focal
position.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzReferring to the on-screen MF indicator
bar (which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnified display area,
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to specify the general focal
Playback Mode
• To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
MF Indicator
position, and then press the <m> button.
Accessories
3 Fine-tune the focus.
zzPress the shutter button halfway to have
the camera fine-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
89
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
be changed.
but the magnified display will not appear.
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
follows.
Basic Guide
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [4] tab, and then choose
Advanced Guide
• To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it.
• To hide the magnified display area, press the <n> button and set [MF-
• To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, press the <n> button and set [Safety MF] on the [4] tab to [Off]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Digital Tele-Converter
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.5x or 2.0x.
This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it would
be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom factor.
Center
P Mode
One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
Playback Mode
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then
XXThe view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
Wi-Fi Functions
• To reduce the AF frame size, press the <n> button and set [AF Frame
Setting Menu
• To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner,
first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold
the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button
halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all
the way down (Focus Lock).
• If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered people are
• The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter button halfway
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
• The respective focal lengths when using [1.5x] and [2.0x] are 37.5 – 750 mm
and 50.0 – 1000 mm (35mm film equivalent).
Index
• The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the
way toward <i> for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge
the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Face AiAF
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
•
•
Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
Basic Guide
1 Choose [Tracking AF].
After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected
faces.
Advanced Guide
[Tracking AF].
Camera Basics
1
2
XX[ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
Using GPS
Function
•
•
When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects,
within a certain range.
Auto Mode/
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2 Choose a subject to focus on.
zzAim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the <q>
button.
Hybrid Auto Mode
After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
Other Shooting
Modes
• If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the
areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press
the shutter button halfway.
• Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
XXWhen the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain range.
XXIf no subject is detected, [ ] is
displayed.
• The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
• No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
zzTo cancel tracking, press the <q> button
again.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
Cover
3 Shoot.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
zzPress the shutter button halfway. [
]
changes to a blue [ ], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
Contents: Basic
Operations
Shooting with Servo AF
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
Basic Guide
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Servo AF] on the [4] tab, and then
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
XXEven after your shot, [ ] is still displayed
and the camera continues to track the
subject.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Focus.
zzThe focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
Other Shooting
Modes
• Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move
too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the
background too closely.
P Mode
• [AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• [e] is not available.
• Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
• In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this
case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF
frame mode.
• If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button,
and then press it halfway again.
Playback Mode
least one second.
• If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered people
However, a name will display if the subject chosen to focus on is the same as
a person detected with Face ID.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
• AF lock shooting is not available.
• [AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Flash
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Changing the Focus Setting
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on subjects
it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead, you can
limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button halfway.
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Activating Flash
You can have the flash fire for each shot. For details on the flash range, see
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [4] tab, and then
Configure the setting.
zzPress the <r> button, choose [h] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Helps avoid missing sudden photo
opportunities, because the camera
constantly focuses on subjects until you
On
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
press the shutter button halfway.
XXIf the flash is down, it will be raised
automatically.
Other Shooting
Modes
Conserves battery power, because the
Off
camera does not focus constantly.
P Mode
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Shooting with Slow Synchro
Shooting with the AF Lock
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not
With this option, the flash fires to increase the brightness of the main
subject (such as people) while the camera shoots at a slow shutter speed to
increase the brightness of the background that is out of the flash range.
Playback Mode
change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
Wi-Fi Functions
1 Lock the focus.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzWith the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the <q> button.
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <r> button, choose [Z] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Accessories
XXThe focus is now locked, and [f] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
Appendix
zzTo unlock the focus, after you release
the shutter button, press the <q> button
again and choose [ ] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial).
Index
XXIf the flash is down, it will be raised
automatically.
XXOnce the setting is complete, [Z] is
displayed.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
93
Cover
Still Images
2 Shoot.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzEven after the flash fires, ensure that
the main subject does not move until the
shutter sound is finished playing.
Shooting with the FE Lock
Contents: Basic
Operations
shots.
Basic Guide
• Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still
and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode]
to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to hold the camera still
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
<o> button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Still Images
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XXThe flash fires, and when [ ] is displayed,
the flash output level is retained.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the <o> button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
P Mode
zzPress the <m> button, choose [X] in
the menu, and adjust the setting by either
pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning
XXThe correction level you specified is now
displayed.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
3 Compose the shot and shoot.
zzAfter one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• FE: Flash Exposure
Setting Menu
9
10
11
• When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the
shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washed-
out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate
automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing
to [Off].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by accessing <n>
• You can also access the [Flash Settings] <n> screen by pressing the
<r> button and then the <n> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
Cover
Other Settings
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Changing the Compression Ratio
(Image Quality)
Basic Guide
Movies
Choose from two compression ratios, as follows: [ ] (Super Fine), [
(Fine). For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit
]
Advanced Guide
Shooting Movies With Subjects at the Same Size Shown
Before Shooting
During movie recording, a smaller image display area is shown, with the
subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting other distortion such as
rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, you can disable this image stabilization.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Configure the setting.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
[IS Settings] screen.
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzChoose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Playback Mode
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
2 Configure the setting.
zzChoose [IS Mode], and then choose the
Wi-Fi Functions
• You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at
the same size shown before shooting.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
Index
Continuous
Shoot Only* Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
95
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Using GPS
Function
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
•
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Specific Shutter Speeds
([Tv] Mode) ..............................97
Specific Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values
Index
([M] Mode)................................98
Specific Aperture Values
([Av] Mode) ..............................97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Enter [M] mode.
1 Enter [B] mode.
Camera Basics
2zzSSeettththeemosdheudtitaelrtos[pMee].d.
zzTurn the <5> dial to set the shutter
speed.
2zzSSeettththeemoadpeedritaul rtoe[Bvalu].e.
zzTurn the <5> dial to set the aperture
value.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a delay
before you can shoot again, as images are processed to remove
noise.
• When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS
• Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 second. If you
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the speed
to 1/2000 second before shooting.
• With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [ ] and
cannot be changed.
• Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
• Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button
halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure.
Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in
white, or use safety shift (see below).
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
• [B]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)
• To avoid exposure problems in [M] and [B] modes, you can have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when
standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the <n> button
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• [M]: Time value
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
97
Cover
Still Images
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level
may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
• Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter
speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the
same when the flash mode is set to [h].
• To have the setting you did not configure in step 2 (whether shutter
speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain standard
exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the <o>
button. Note that standard exposure may not be possible with some
settings.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and
aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Enter [D] mode.
Using GPS
Function
zzSet the mode dial to [D].
• With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [ ] and
cannot be changed.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <o> button, choose
adjustment of shutter speed or aperture
value, and turn the <5> dial to specify
a value.
Other Shooting
Modes
• [D]: Manual
• Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
XXAn exposure level mark based on your
specified value is shown on the exposure
level indicator for comparison to the
Aperture Value
Playback Mode
Shutter Speed
standard exposure level.
Standard Exposure
Wi-Fi Functions
XXThe exposure level mark is shown in
orange when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 2 stops.
Level
Exposure
Level Indicator
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Exposure Level
Mark
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
Cover
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
Adjusting the Flash Output
Choose from the three flash levels in [D] mode.
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Enter [D] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [D].
Advanced Guide
2 Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <m> button, choose [X] in
the menu, and adjust the setting by either
pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
5
XXOnce the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
[
]: low, [
]: medium, [
]: high
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
choosing [Flash Output] in [Flash Settings] on the [4] tab.
• You can set the flash level in [M] or [B] mode by accessing <n>
Mode] to [Manual].
• You can also access the [Flash Settings] <n> screen by pressing the
<r> button and then the <n> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
99
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
7
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Playback Mode
Using GPS
Function
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
•
To prepare the camera for these operations, press the <1> button to
enter Playback mode.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Viewing....................................101
Erasing Images.......................113
Rotating Images .....................115
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Browsing and Filtering
Images ...................................105
Accessories
Tagging Images as
Editing Face ID Information ..107
Image Viewing Options..........108
Protecting Images..................111
Favorites................................116
Appendix
Editing Still Images................117
Editing Movies........................121
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
Cover
Still Images
Movies
zzMovies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
] icon.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Viewing
Contents: Basic
Operations
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Basic Guide
1 Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the <1> button.
XXYour last shot is displayed.
Advanced Guide
3 Play movies.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzTo start playback, press the <m> button,
choose [ ] (either press the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <5> dial), and then
press the <m> button again.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Browse through your images.
zzTo view the previous image, press
the <q> button or turn the <5> dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the <r> button or turn the
<5> dial clockwise.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
4 Adjust the volume.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to adjust the
volume.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzPress and hold the <q><r> buttons to
browse through images quickly.
zzTo adjust the volume when the bar is no
longer displayed, press the <o><p>
buttons.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Volume Indicator
Setting Menu
9
10
11
5 Pause playback.
zzTo pause or resume playback, press the
<m> button.
XXAfter the movie is finished, [
displayed.
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, turn the
Accessories
5
5
<
<
> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the
> dial to browse through images.
Appendix
] is
zzTo return to single-image display, press
the <m> button.
Index
zzTo browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the <o><p> buttons in
Scroll Display mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway.
• To deactivate Scroll Display, press the <n> button, choose [Scroll
Display] on the [1] tab, and then choose [Off].
• If you prefer to have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, press the <n> button, and on the [1] tab, choose [Resume] and
then [Last shot].
• To change the transition shown between images, press the <n> button,
choose [Transition] on the [1] tab, and then press the <q><r> buttons to
choose the effect.
Switching Display Modes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Press the <l> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
Basic Guide
SX280 HS
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
No Information
Display
Simple
Information
Display
Detailed
Information
Display
GPS Information
Display
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
SX270 HS
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
No Information
Display
Simple
Information
Display
Detailed
Information
Display
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
SX280 HS
Appendix
• Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is connected via
Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
SX280 HS
GPS Information Display
Contents: Basic
Operations
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
zzIn the GPS information display, you
can view still image and movie location
information (latitude, longitude, and
elevation recorded when [GPS] was set
and time.
Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Camera Basics
Histogram
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
High
Low
zzThe graph in detailed information display
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
GPS Information
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzYou can also check the GPS information
of camera images via smartphone
Dark
Bright
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• [---] shown instead of numerical values indicates that the information
was not received from GPS satellites, or that accurate positioning
was not possible.
• [---] is shown when [GPS Auto Time] is set to [Off], because the
UTC (shooting date and time) is not recorded. To have the UTC
• GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
• UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean
Time
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
103
Cover
Movies
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
Contents: Basic
Operations
1 Choose a movie.
Basic Guide
of still image shooting as follows.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the date
Advanced Guide
1 Choose an image.
Camera Basics
zz[Play digest movie with FUNC.] is
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Play the movie.
displayed in still images shot in [
]
Using GPS
Function
zzPress the <m> button to start playback.
mode.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Checking People Detected in Face ID
displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Play the digest movie.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
[
XXThe digest movie recorded automatically
on the day of still image shooting is
played back from the beginning.
Switch to simple information
display mode and check.
zzPress the <l> button repeatedly until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the <q><r> buttons to
choose an image.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• In a moment, [Play digest movie with FUNC.] will no longer be displayed.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
XXNames will be displayed on detected
people.
Appendix
Index
• If you do not want names to display on images shot using Face ID, press the
<n> button, choose [Face ID Info] on the [1] tab, and then set [Name
Display] to [Off].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Browsing and Filtering Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
Still Images
Movies
Contents: Basic
Operations
Navigating Through Images in an Index
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
Basic Guide
you are looking for.
Name
Advanced Guide
Displays the images with detected faces, or images
shot in [I] mode.
People
1 Display images in an index.
zzMove the zoom lever toward <g> to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Shot Date
Favorites
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still image/Movie
[
zzTo display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward <k>. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
Other Shooting
Modes
1 Choose a search condition.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose a condition
P Mode
2 Choose an image.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzTurn the <5> dial to scroll through the
images.
Playback Mode
zzWhen you have selected [ ], [ ], or
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose an image.
[
], choose the condition by pressing
Wi-Fi Functions
the <o><p><q><r> buttons on the
screen displayed, and then press the
<m> button.
XXAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzPress the <m> button to view the
selected image in single-image display.
Accessories
2 View the filtered images.
zzImages matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view
only these images, press the <q><r>
buttons, or turn the <5> dial.
zzTo cancel filtered display, choose [ ] in
step 1.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
105
Cover
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
• When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available. Note that [ ] is
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
displayed together, but they can also be viewed individually.
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
them to a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in “Protecting
1 Choose a grouped image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image labeled
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[
].
Using GPS
Function
is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose [ ].
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose
P Mode
[
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 View individual images in the
group.
zzPressing the <q><r> buttons or turning
the <5> dial will display only images in
the group.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
zzTo cancel group playback, press the
<m> button, choose [ ] in the menu,
and press the <m> button again
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
Cover
Editing Face ID Information
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• During group playback (step 3), you can use the menu functions accessed
by pressing the <m> button. You can also browse through images quickly
group at once or add them to a photobook by choosing [All Images in Group]
• To ungroup images so that you can view them individually, press the <n>
button, choose [Group Images] on the [1] tab, and then choose [Off]
playback.
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or
Contents: Basic
Operations
erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing Names
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button and choose
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and
then press the <m> button.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
2 Choose an image.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
choose an image and press the <m>
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the < > dial to choose
the name to change, and then press the
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
5
Appendix
<m> button.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
107
Cover
3 Choose the item to edit.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose [Overwrite],
and then press the <m> button.
Image Viewing Options
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Magnifying Images
Basic Guide
1 Magnify an image.
zzMoving the zoom lever toward <k> will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
Advanced Guide
4 Choose the name of the person
to overwrite.
zzFollow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
the name of the person you want to
overwrite.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
zzTo zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward <g>. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Erasing Names
P Mode
[Erase] and press the <m> button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Approximate Position
of Displayed Area
Playback Mode
2 Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
zzTo move the display position, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
zzTo switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the <5> dial.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
• You can return to single-image display from magnified display by pressing the
<n> button.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Changing Slideshow Settings
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions
between images and the display duration of each image.
Viewing Slideshows
Contents: Basic
Operations
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each
image is displayed for about three seconds.
Basic Guide
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [1] tab
Choose a slideshow transition and
start playback.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [.] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
XXThe slideshow will start a few seconds
after [Loading image] is displayed.
zzPress the <n> button to stop the
slideshow.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
2 Configure the settings.
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and
zzTo start the slideshow with your settings,
choose [Start] and press the <m>
button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
during slideshows.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
• To pause or resume slideshows, press the <m> button.
• You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <5> dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the
<q><r> buttons down.
played.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
109
Cover
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart
Shuffle.
Auto Playback of Similar Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
(Smart Shuffle)
• Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images similar to it
that you may wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images,
the camera offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back
images in an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many
shots, in many kinds of scenes.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
Using GPS
Function
1 Choose Smart Shuffle.
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
Other Shooting
Modes
XXFour candidate images are displayed.
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M
6
7
8
9
10
11
2 Choose an image.
Mode
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose the image you want to view next.
XXYour chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
zzFor full-screen display of the center
image, press the <m> button. To restore
the original display, press the <m>
button again.
Index
zzPress the <n> button to restore
single-image display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To
erase them this way, first cancel protection.
Protecting Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
Choosing Images Individually
Basic Guide
1 Choose [Select].
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose
is displayed.
Advanced Guide
zzFollowing step 2 in “Using the Menu”
<m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzTo cancel protection, repeat this process
and choose [:] again, and then press
the <m> button.
Using GPS
Function
2 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Using the Menu
P Mode
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button and choose
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
3 Protect the image.
zzPress the <n> button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
2 Choose a selection method.
zzChoose a menu item and a setting as
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
Accessories
Appendix
• Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn
the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
Index
• Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
Cover
Selecting a Range
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
zzImages before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
1 Choose [Select Range].
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzFollowing step 2 in “Using the Menu”
press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2 Choose a starting image.
zzPress the <m> button.
Camera Basics
4 Protect the images.
zzPress the <p> button to choose
[Protect], and then press the <m>
button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• You can also choose the first or last image by turning the <5> dial when the
top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Choose an ending image.
zzPress the <r> button to choose [Last
image], and then press the <m> button.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Specifying All Images at Once
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Erasing Images
1 Choose [Select All Images].
Contents: Basic
Operations
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
zzFollowing step 2 in “Using the Menu”
press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Choose an image to erase.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image.
2 Protect the images.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Protect], and then
press the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
Using GPS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2 Erase the image.
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <p> button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>
button.
Other Shooting
Modes
• To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of
“Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”.
P Mode
XXThe current image is now erased.
zzTo cancel erasure, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <5> dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the <m>
button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
Cover
Erasing All Images
You can erase all images at once. Be careful when erasing images,
cannot be erased.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Choosing a Selection Method
Advanced Guide
2 Choose an image.
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, and then
zzOnce you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose a selection method.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose a selection method,
and then press the <m> button.
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
P Mode
3 Erase the image.
zzPress the <n> button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Preliminary Notes
Selecting a Range
and Legal Information
Rotating Images
1 Choose [Select Range].
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Range] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose images.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [\].
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose
Advanced Guide
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
3 Erase the images.
zzPress the <p> button to choose [Erase],
and then press the <m> button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Rotate the image.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <q> or <r> button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the <m> button to complete
the setting.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Specifying All Images at Once
1 Choose [Select All Images].
Playback Mode
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Images] and press the <m> button.
Using the Menu
Wi-Fi Functions
1 Choose [Rotate].
Setting Menu
9
10
11
2 Erase the images.
zzPress the <n> button and choose
Accessories
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
115
Cover
Still Images
Movies
2 Rotate the image.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Tagging Images as Favorites
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all
of those images.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image.
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
•
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
• Movies with an image quality of [
], [
], or [
] cannot
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
be rotated.
Using GPS
Function
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose
[
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic rotation by the camera, which
rotates images shot in vertical orientation so they are displayed vertically on
the camera.
XX[Tagged as Favorite] is displayed.
zzTo untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [ ] again, and then press
the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Using the Menu
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [1] tab, and then choose
1 Choose [Favorites].
Playback Mode
zzPress the <n> button and choose
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
[Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the
original orientation.
[Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated
images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
Cover
2 Choose an image.
Editing Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.
zzTo untag the image, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
Contents: Basic
Operations
card has sufficient free space.
Basic Guide
Still Images
Resizing Images
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 Finish the setup process.
zzPress the <n> button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Using GPS
Function
1 Choose [Resize].
zzPress the <n> button and choose
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
2 Choose an image.
• Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• Favorite images will have a three-star rating (
to computers running Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista. (Does not
apply to movies.)
) when transferred
3 Choose an image size.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose the size, and then
press the <m> button.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
XX[Save new image?] is displayed.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
117
Cover
Still Images
4 Save the new image.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Cropping
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Contents: Basic
Operations
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
Basic Guide
XXThe image is now saved as a new file.
1 Choose [Cropping].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [1] tab
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
5 Review the new image.
zzPress the <n> button. [Display new
image?] is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
2 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Yes], and then
press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
Cropping Area
3 Adjust the cropping area.
XXThe saved image is now displayed.
P Mode
XXA frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped.
• Editing is not possible for images saved as [ ] in step 3.
• Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
XXThe original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped is shown in the lower right.
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Preview of Image After Cropping
zzTo move the frame, press the
9
10
11
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
Resolution After Cropping
Accessories
zzTo change the frame orientation, press
the <l> button.
zzFaces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. To crop the image based on this
frame, turn the <5> dial to switch to the
other frame.
Appendix
Index
zzPress the <m> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
Cover
Still Images
4 Save as a new image and
review.
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate
file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color Tones (My
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
• Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [
]
Advanced Guide
1 Choose [My Colors].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [1] tab
Camera Basics
• Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping.
• Cropped images will have a smaller resolution than uncropped images.
• If you crop still images shot using Face ID, only the names of the people left in
the cropped image will remain.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
3 Choose an option.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
4 Save as a new image and
Wi-Fi Functions
review.
Setting Menu
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
9
10
11
Accessories
• Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little
lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired
color.
Appendix
Index
• The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
119
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Correcting Red-Eye
Contents: Basic
Operations
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate file.
corrected image as a separate file.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [1]
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [i-Contrast].
Using GPS
Function
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [1] tab
2 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
(=
35).
2 Choose an image.
3 Correct the image.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
XXRed-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
zzEnlarge or reduce images as needed.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
3 Choose an option.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
4 Save as a new image and review.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
XXThe image is now saved as a new file.
zzFollow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
4 Save as a new image and
Setting Menu
9
10
11
review.
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
Accessories
Appendix
• For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
Index
• Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
• Some images may not be corrected accurately.
• To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased.
• Protected images cannot be overwritten.
• If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using
[Low], [Medium], or [High].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
Cover
Movies
3 Review the edited movie.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
Editing Movies
[
], and then press the <m> button.
Contents: Basic
Operations
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end
The edited movie is now played.
zzTo edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
zzTo cancel editing, press the <o><p>
buttons to choose [ ]. Press the <m>
button, choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial),
and then press the <m> button again.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [*].
Advanced Guide
zzFollowing steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
<m> button.
XXThe movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
4 Save the edited movie.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
[
], and then press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
Movie Editing Panel
2 Specify portions to cut.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
P Mode
[
] or [ ].
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzTo view the portions you can cut
(identified by [ ] on the screen), press
the <q><r> buttons or turn the <5>
dial to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the
movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and
cut the end of the movie by choosing
XXThe movie is now saved as a new file.
Playback Mode
• To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite]
in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.
• [Overwrite] is only available when memory cards lack sufficient free
space.
• Movies may not be saved if the battery runs out while saving is in
progress.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Movie Editing Bar
9
10
11
[
].
Accessories
zzEven if you move [ ] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, choosing [ ] will only
cut the portion from the nearest [ ] to
the left, and choosing [ ] will cut the
portion from the nearest [ ] to the right.
• When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery or an
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
121
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
8
SX280 HS
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Wi-Fi Functions
Use Wi-Fi functions to send images from the camera
to a variety of compatible devices, and use the
camera with Web services
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
What You Can Do With
Wi-Fi.......................................123
Connecting to Another
Camera...................................133
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Using Wi-Fi to Send Images
From the Camera ..................124
Connecting to a Computer....134
Connecting to a Printer .........139
Sending Images......................141
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions ...........................124
Sending Images to a Computer
via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY ..............................143
Accessories
Security Precautions .............125
Glossary..................................126
Appendix
Registering a Camera Nickname
(First time only).....................126
Geotagging Images on the
Camera...................................144
Index
Connecting to Web
Services.................................127
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi
Settings..................................145
Connecting to a
Smartphone...........................130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Cover
What You Can Do With Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Computer
Use the software to wirelessly send images from the camera to
a computer. Refer to the Software Guide for details.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
This camera is an approved Wi-Fi®* product. You can wirelessly connect to
and send images to the following devices.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Note that, in this chapter, wireless LAN functions other than Wi-Fi may be
referred to as Wi-Fi.
Connecting to a Printer
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer
(supporting DPS over IP) to print them.
Basic Guide
* Wi-Fi is a brand name that indicates interoperability certification of Wi-Fi
devices.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connecting to Web Services
Using GPS
Function
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is an online photo service available
to those who have purchased this product. If you register for
free as a member, you can use CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
to access various Web services, such as social networking
services set on a computer. Images on the camera can also
be sent automatically to a computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Connecting to a Smartphone
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that
have Wi-Fi functions. You can also geotag your shots from a
connected smartphone or tablet. Installation of a dedicated
application on the smartphone or tablet is required. See the
Canon website for details.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
For convenience in this manual, smartphones and tablets are
collectively referred to as smartphones.
9
10
11
Accessories
Connecting to Another Camera
Use the Wi-Fi function to send images between Canon-brand,
compact digital cameras.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
123
Cover
Using Wi-Fi to Send Images From the
Camera
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
•
•
The model number is PC1886 or PC1967
(including WLAN module model WM217). To
identify your model, check the label on the
bottom of the camera for a number beginning
with PC.
Device
4
O
–
c
Operation
Basic Guide
Registering a camera
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
Advanced Guide
Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
Installing the software
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where use
is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
WLAN use in other countries and regions.
Using GPS
Function
Adjusting settings for
using Web services
from CANON iMAGE
–
–
–
–
O
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Installing the dedicated
application on the
–
–
–
–
O
O
•
•
Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
P Mode
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certification labels from the product
Establishing a connection
with the camera
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export
permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese
government is necessary to export strategic resources or services
(including this product) outside Japan.
O*2
O
O
–
–
Playback Mode
Transferring images to a
–
–
–
–
O
Wi-Fi Functions
•
•
Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to
or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
Printing images
Setting Menu
–
–
–
–
O
9
10
11
Accessories
Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
Appendix
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may be erased due to
incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or static
electricity, accident or malfunction. Be sure to make notes of wireless
LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon accepts no
responsibility for degradation of content, direct or indirect damages or
loss of revenue arising from use of the product.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
Cover
•
•
When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset
the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Canon will not make compensation for loss or theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages incurred due to
unauthorized access to registered data (image transfer destinations, etc.)
if the product is lost or stolen.
Basic Guide
•
Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
Advanced Guide
•
•
Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Camera Basics
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than
as described in this guide.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
Other Shooting
Modes
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
•
Transmission monitoring
P Mode
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
•
Unauthorized network access
Playback Mode
•
This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time
as this product.
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Index
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
125
Cover
Glossary
Registering a Camera Nickname
(First time only)
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Wi-Fi related terms are explained here. Also refer to the explanations of
terms given in the respective sections of this guide.
Contents: Basic
Operations
To start with, register a camera nickname.
•
Access point
This nickname will be displayed on the screen of target devices when
connecting to other devices via Wi-Fi.
Basic Guide
A device that relays radio wave signals to create a Wi-Fi network. This
term also refers to a network that you can use to connect to the Internet
via Wi-Fi.
Advanced Guide
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Camera Basics
•
Firewall
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
This is a system that protects networks from computer viruses, external
unauthorized access, and security threats. This is set on the Wi-Fi router
or computer.
Using GPS
Function
zzPress the <o> button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
•
•
SSID/ESSID
2 Access the keyboard.
zzPress the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
Preconfigured numbers and letters used to identify a specific access
point. Also called the “access point name” or “network name”.
P Mode
Encryption key
This is a key used to encrypt data for transmission to and from an access
point.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
•
•
IP address
Playback Mode
This is an address used to identify a device within a network.
MAC address
3 Enter a nickname.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose a character,
and then press the <m> button to enter
it.
This is a unique address pre-assigned to a network device. It is also
referred to as a “physical address”.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP
enables PictBridge connections in network environments,
and the camera is also compatible with this standard.
zzUp to 16 characters can be used.
zzChoose [ ] or [ ] and press the <m>
button to move the cursor.
Appendix
Index
zzChoose [ ] and press the <m> button.
The previous character will be deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
Cover
4 Save the settings.
Connecting to Web Services
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzPress the <n> button, choose [OK]
(either press the <o><p> buttons or
turn the <5> dial), and then press the
<m> button.
Set up the camera to use a variety of Web services as follows.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Adjusting Settings for Using Web Services
From CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Adjust account settings for the Web services you want to use.
A computer is required for Web service settings, starting with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY.
Basic Guide
• When connecting wirelessly to any device other than a computer, a memory
card must be inserted in the camera. Additionally, the memory card must
contain images in order for you to access Web services or connect to a
smartphone or printer wirelessly.
• To change the camera’s nickname, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab, and
then choose [Change Device Nickname].
Advanced Guide
•
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
•
Because CameraWindow is used to adjust settings, be sure to install it
For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
•
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
1 Register as a CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY member.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzFrom a computer or other device
connected to the Internet, access
iMAGE GATEWAY site for your region.
zzFollow the instructions displayed to
complete member registration (free of
charge).
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
zzYou must have an account with Web
services other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For
further details, check the websites for
each Web service you want to register.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
127
Cover
2 Connect the camera to a
zzOn a computer running Windows, there
is no need to connect the interface cable
if you complete settings in advance
via Wi-Fi.
6 Set a Web service you want to
use.
zzFollow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services you
want to use.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
zzOnce the Web service settings are
complete, click [Finish] at the bottom of
the window to close it.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
7 Apply Web service settings to
the camera.
zzChoose the name of the Web service you
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Access the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY login screen.
zzClick [Camera Settings], and then click
[Set Up Web Services].
want to set on the camera, and click [
in the middle of the lists.
]
Other Shooting
Modes
XXThe name of the Web service that will be
saved to the camera will be displayed in
the [Camera] list.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzClick [o] or [p] to change the order of
the Web services that will be displayed in
the camera’s Wi-Fi menu.
Playback Mode
5 Login to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
zzEnter your CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
login name and password, and then click
[Login].
Wi-Fi Functions
zzAfter you finish adjusting settings in the
[Camera] list to your liking, close the
window.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
XXThe settings of Web services and for
transferring images via the server are
applied to the camera.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
Cover
Establishing Web Service Connections
Connect to Web services registered to the camera.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• An Internet connection is required to access CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (an Internet browser must be installed on the computer,
you must have an account with an Internet service provider, and an
Internet connection must be established).
• When connecting to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, check the CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY website for browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer,
etc.) settings, conditions, and version information.
Contents: Basic
Operations
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the <o> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2 Choose a Web service.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose the icon of
the destination Web service, and then
press the <m> button.
zzIf the Web service has multiple recipients,
select the desired recipient on the [Select
Recipient] screen, and press the <m>
button.
• Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• After logging in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY the second time in step 5, the
screen in step 7 will be displayed. To change settings for Web services you
use, click [Edit Web Services].
• To add or change Web services, repeat the above procedures starting from
step 2.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
3 Connect to an access point.
zzWith a WPS-compatible access point,
connect to the access point by following
steps 4 – 6 in “Adding a Computer”
zzWith an access point that is not WPS-
compatible, connect to the access point
by following steps 2 – 3 in “Connecting to
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
XXWhen you have connected to the Web
service, the image transfer screen will be
Server] is selected, images will be sent
as soon as a connection is established
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
129
Cover
Connecting to a Smartphone
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• When you are in the vicinity of an access point that you have
previously connected to, the camera will automatically connect
to it in step 2. To change access points, select [Switch Network]
from the screen that will be displayed when the connection is
being established, and follow steps 4 – 5 in “Adding a Computer”
When establishing a Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone, you can either
use the camera as an access point or use another access point.
Follow these instructions when using the camera as an access point. When
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• After you have accessed the Wi-Fi menu once, you can access it again by
pressing the <o> button. The recent target device is listed first, so you can
easily connect again by pressing the <o><p> buttons to choose it. To add
a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the <q><r>
buttons, and then configure the setting. If you prefer not to display recent
target devices, press the <n> button, and on the [3] tab, choose [Wi-Fi
Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
Installing CameraWindow on a Smartphone
Before connecting your camera to a smartphone, first install the free
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
dedicated application, CameraWindow, on your smartphone.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Connect the smartphone to a
Other Shooting
Modes
network.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
2 Install CameraWindow.
zzFor an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch,
download and install CameraWindow
from the Mac App Store.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFor an Android device, download and
install CameraWindow from Google Play.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Register the smartphone name.
3
zzOn the smartphone, start CameraWindow
and enter a name for the smartphone that
will be displayed on the camera.
Appendix
Index
• For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions),
refer to the Canon website.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
Cover
Establishing the Smartphone Connection
4 Use the smartphone to connect
to the network displayed on the
camera screen.
zzChoose the displayed SSID (network
name) from the smartphone’s Wi-Fi
setting menu.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the <o> button.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
2 Choose a smartphone.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose [ ], and
then press the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
zzEnter the encryption key displayed on the
camera screen into the password field on
the smartphone.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
5 Start CameraWindow on the
smartphone.
XXOnce the smartphone is recognized on
the camera, the device connection screen
will be displayed on the camera.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
6 Choose a smartphone to
connect to.
zzChoose the smartphone for the
the <o><p> buttons or by turning the
<5> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
XXThe camera’s SSID and encryption key
are displayed on the screen.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
131
Cover
7 Adjust the privacy settings.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Yes], and then
press the <m> button.
XXYou can now use the smartphone to
receive images sent from the camera,
or to geotag images on the camera
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• You can connect to smartphones that you have already connected to by
choosing them on the [Select a Device] screen in step 3.
• After you have accessed the Wi-Fi menu once, you can access it again by
pressing the <o> button. The recent target device is listed first, so you can
easily connect again by pressing the <o><p> buttons to choose it. To add
a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the <q><r>
buttons, and then configure the setting. If you prefer not to display recent
target devices, press the <n> button, and on the [3] tab, choose [Wi-Fi
Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
• The image quality level for movies that can be sent may differ depending
on the smartphone. Refer to the instruction manual provided with your
smartphone for details.
• To add multiple smartphones, repeat the above procedures starting from
step 1.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
XXWhen the smartphone has been added
successfully, the image transfer screen
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• To change privacy settings for smartphones added to the list, choose the
smartphone whose settings you want to change from [Edit a Device] in step 3,
and then choose [View Settings].
P Mode
• When you are in the vicinity of an access point that you have
previously connected to, the camera will automatically connect
to it in step 3. To change access points, select [Switch Network]
from the screen that will be displayed when the connection is
being established, and follow steps 4 – 5 in “Adding a Computer”
• All camera images can be viewed from the connected smartphone
when you choose [Yes] in step 7. To keep camera images private,
so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone, choose [No] in
step 7.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
Cover
Connecting to Another Camera
XXWhen the target camera has been added
successfully, the image transfer screen
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows.
Contents: Basic
Operations
• Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected
to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-Fi cards cannot
be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function. You cannot connect to
PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS
cameras with this camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• After you have accessed the Wi-Fi menu once, you can access it again by
pressing the <o> button. The recent target device is listed first, so you can
easily connect again by pressing the <o><p> buttons to choose it. To add
a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the <q><r>
buttons, and then configure the setting. If you prefer not to display recent
target devices, press the <n> button, and on the [3] tab, choose [Wi-Fi
Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
• To add multiple cameras, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1.
• Once a camera is added, the camera nickname will be displayed on the screen
in step 3. To connect to a camera again, simply choose the camera nickname
from the list.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the <o> button.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose a camera.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose [4], and
then press the <m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
zzFollow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera.
XXCamera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
133
Cover
Connecting to a Computer
Configure computer settings for the connection, add the computer as a
connection destination, and transfer images to the computer wirelessly
using the software CameraWindow as follows.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings,
contact the system administrator for details.
• These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Check sheet
• When connected to a computer, the camera is used to establish the
connection and then the computer (software CameraWindow) is used to
transfer images.
Advanced Guide
Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
○
○
None
Using GPS
Function
WEP (open system
authentication)
WPA-PSK (TKIP)
WPA-PSK (AES)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
WPA2-PSK (AES)
Preparing to Register a Computer
Prepare to register a computer.
Network certificate/data encryption (encryption method/
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during transmission via
Wi-Fi.
○
○
○
○
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Checking Your Computer Environment
For computer environments that allow Wi-Fi connection with a camera, refer
Encryption key (network key)
The data encryption key used for transmission via Wi-Fi.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Key index (sent key)
The key specified when using WEP for Network certificate/
data encryption.
○
1
• Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
• Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For further details, see the following website.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting
multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a
“Wi-Fi router”.
• This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”.
• If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the
camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s
MAC address by choosing the [3] tab, [Wi-Fi Settings], and then [Check MAC
Address].
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Checking Your Wi-Fi Environment
To use Wi-Fi, a Wi-Fi base unit (Wi-Fi router, etc.) that acts as your access
point must be connected to a computer. Be sure to use a Wi-Fi base unit
Appendix
Index
If you are already using Wi-Fi, confirm the following items and mark each
one on the Check sheet. For instructions on checking network settings,
refer to the access point user guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
Cover
Adding a Computer
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Computer Settings for Connecting via Wi-Fi
(Windows only)
On a computer running Windows, you must configure the following settings
before you can connect the camera to the computer wirelessly.
Add a computer to your list of devices to connect to via Wi-Fi.
Follow these instructions when using a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
compatible access point to establish a push-button connection.
If your access point is not WPS-compatible, establish a connection as
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Confirm the computer is
connected to Wi-Fi.
zzFor instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
Advanced Guide
• WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over Wi-Fi.
You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method for
settings on a WPS supported device.
• Refer to the user guide provided with your access point to check if it supports
WPS.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Configure the setting.
zzClick in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
• Be sure to also read the user guide included with your access point.
Other Shooting
Modes
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the <o> button.
P Mode
zzIn the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
2 Choose a computer.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose [ ], and
then press the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in
step 2.
Setting Menu
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to find the computer to access via Wi-Fi.
9
10
11
Accessories
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
XXA list of detected access points will be
displayed in the [Select Network] screen.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to find the camera.
Appendix
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
Index
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically.
• Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as
described here. Check the settings of your security software.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
135
Cover
4 Choose [WPS Connection].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [WPS Connection],
and then press the <m> button.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
8 Install a driver (first Windows
connection only).
zzWhen the screen at left is displayed, click
the Start menu on the computer, click
[Control Panel], and then click [Add a
device].
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzDouble click the connected camera icon.
XXDriver installation will begin.
XXAfter driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
5 Choose [PBC Method].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [PBC Method], and
then press the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
6 Establish the connection.
zzOn the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
zzOn the camera, press the <m> button.
XXThe camera will connect to the access
point.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
• When you are in the vicinity of an access point that you have
previously connected to, the camera will automatically connect
to it in step 3. To change access points, select [Switch Network]
from the screen that will be displayed when the connection is
being established, and follow steps 4 – 5 in “Adding a Computer”
Wi-Fi Functions
XXA list of computers connected to the
access point will appear in the [Select a
Device] screen.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
7
Choose a computer to connect to.
Appendix
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose the computer name,
and then press the <m> button.
Index
zzWhen using a Macintosh computer,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Cover
Connecting to Access Points in the List
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• You can connect to computers that you have already connected to by choosing
them on the [Select a Device] screen in step 3.
• If you chose [PIN Method] in step 5, a PIN code will be displayed on the
screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the
[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user guide included
with your access point.
1 View the listed access points.
zzView the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 3 of “Adding a
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
• To add multiple computers, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1.
• To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
Advanced Guide
2 Choose an access point.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose a network (access
point), and then press the <m> button.
• When accessing the Wi-Fi menu from the second time by pressing the <o>
button, the most recently connected device will be displayed first, allowing
you to easily select it for connection. To add a new device, display the device
selection screen by pressing the <q><r> buttons, and then configure the
setting.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
3 Enter the access point’s
encryption key.
zzPress the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the encryption
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Next], and then
press the <m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
4 Choose [Auto].
Accessories
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Auto], and then
press the <m> button.
Appendix
XXA list of other devices connected to the
access point will appear in the [Select a
Device] screen.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
Cover
5 Choose a computer to connect
to.
zzChoose the computer to connect to,
following steps 7 – 8 in “Adding a
now added to the list.
Using CameraWindow to Transfer Images to
a Computer
Use the computer (software CameraWindow) to transfer images from the
camera to the computer.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• For information on the access point’s encryption key, refer to the body of the
access point or its user manual.
• Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected,
choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to manually set an access point. Follow
on-screen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and an encryption
key.
Camera Basics
1 Display CameraWindow.
zzIn Windows, click [Downloads Images
From Canon Camera using Canon
CameraWindow].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XXCameraWindow will be displayed.
XXOn a Macintosh computer,
CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
• When you use an access point that you have already connected to for
connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the encryption key in step 3.
To use the same encryption key, press the <q><r> buttons to choose [Next],
and then press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• To add multiple computers, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
2 Import images.
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
XXImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
zzClick [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
Cover
Connecting to a Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
When establishing a Wi-Fi connection with a printer, you can either use the
camera as an access point (Camera Access Point mode) or use another
access point.
Follow these instructions when using the camera as an access point. When
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• If CameraWindow is not displayed when using a Macintosh computer, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
• Movies will take longer to import since the file size is larger than still images.
• To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
• You can also specify to save all images or only selected images to the
computer, and you can change the destination folder. Refer to the Software
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the <o> button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose a printer.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose [2], and
then press the <m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
139
Cover
4 Use the printer to connect to
the network displayed on the
camera screen.
zzChoose the displayed SSID (network
name) from the printer’s Wi-Fi setting
menu.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• When you are in the vicinity of an access point that you have
previously connected to, the camera will automatically connect
to it in step 3. To change access points, select [Switch Network]
from the screen that will be displayed when the connection is
being established, and follow steps 4 – 5 in “Adding a Computer”
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzEnter the encryption key displayed on the
camera screen into the password field on
the printer.
• You can connect to printers that you have already connected to by choosing
them on the [Select a Device] screen in step 3.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• After you have accessed the Wi-Fi menu once, you can access it again by
pressing the <o> button. The recent target device is listed first, so you can
easily connect again by pressing the <o><p> buttons to choose it. If you
prefer not to display recent target devices, press the <n> button, and on
the [3] tab, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. To add a new
device, display the device selection screen by pressing the <q><r> buttons,
and then configure the setting.
Using GPS
Function
5 Choose the printer.
zzOnce the printer is ready for the
connection, press the <m> button when
the printer name is displayed on the
camera.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
XXThe printer will be added to the list on the
camera.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
6 Choose an image to print.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image.
zzPress the <m> button, and then choose
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Print], and then
press the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
XXPrinting now begins.
zzFor detailed printing instructions, see
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
Cover
2 Send the image.
Sending Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the
<m> button.
Send images wirelessly to destinations registered on the camera as follows.
Contents: Basic
Operations
• Images can be uploaded to social networking services or sent to email
addresses, via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. For details, refer to the CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY website.
• Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. Only one movie can be sent.
However, if the destination is a Web service, the number of movies and
images that can be sent may be less depending on the Web service. See the
desired Web service for details.
• Movies that can be sent have a maximum time of two minutes (excluding
digest movies).
• Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long
time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level.
• When connected to a computer, images are transferred using the computer
zzWhen uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the <m> button.
XXImage transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
XXAfter images are uploaded to a Web
service, [OK] is displayed. Press the
<m> button to return to the playback
screen.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
XXAfter sending images to a camera or
smartphone, [Transfer completed] will be
displayed, and the display will return to
the image transfer screen.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Sending Images Individually
1 Choose an image.
zzTurn the <5> dial to choose an image
to send.
• For digest movies, a separate, compressed file is sent instead of
the original file. Note that this may delay transmission, and the file
cannot be sent unless there is enough space for it on the memory
card.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers.
• On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons.
Accessories
Appendix
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
However, no icon is displayed when the camera is used as an access point.
• To disconnect from the camera, press the <n> button, and after the
confirmation message, choose [OK] (either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <5> dial) and press the <m> button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
141
Cover
Sending Multiple Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)
On the screen for sending images, press the <o><p> buttons to choose
1 Choose [Select and send].
Contents: Basic
Operations
[
], and then press the <m> button. On the next screen, press the
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose [Select and send], and then press
the <m> button.
<o><p> buttons to choose the resolution (size) of images to send, and
Basic Guide
then press the <m> button.
•
•
To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
Advanced Guide
Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected
size before sending.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
2 Choose images.
• Movies cannot be resized.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose an image to send, and then press
the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzAfter you finish choosing images, press
the <n> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
3 Send the images.
9
10
11
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Send], and then
press the <m> button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
Cover
Sending Images to a Computer via
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• You can also choose images in step 2 by pressing the zoom lever twice toward
<k> to access single-image display and then pressing the <q><r> buttons or
turning the <5> dial.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be
sent to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
• In step 3, you can choose the resolution (size) to resize images to before
Basic Guide
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
However, the images will be deleted after a while. Start up the computer so
that they can be saved.
Advanced Guide
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments (alphanumeric characters and
symbols) to images that you send to email addresses, social networking
services, etc. The number of characters and symbols that can be entered
may differ depending on the Web service.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
1 Choose the type of images
to send (only when sending
movies with images).
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Send via Server],
and then press the <q><r> buttons to
choose [Stills/Movies].
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Choose [ ].
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose [ ], and
then press the <m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
zzWhen sending only still images, go to
step 2.
2 Add a comment.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFollow step 3 in “Registering a Camera
add a comment.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
3 Send the image.
Index
• When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is automatically sent.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
143
Cover
2 Send the images.
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
choose [ ].
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
XXOnce the connection is established, the
images are sent. (The screen will close in
about one minute.)
• Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time
destinations that are in other time zones.
• The smartphone you will use for geotagging must be authorized to
• Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
Advanced Guide
zzAfter the images are sent, [OK] is
displayed. Press the <m> button to
return to the playback screen.
XXWhen the images have been sent
successfully to the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, [ ] is displayed on
the screen.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
3 Turn on the computer.
zzImages are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
P Mode
• You cannot overwrite GPS information that was recorded at the time of
shooting with GPS information from a smartphone.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery or an
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any
images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to
the computer.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
Cover
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
4 Choose a device to edit.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose the device to edit,
and then press the <m> button.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Editing Connection Information
Basic Guide
Edit connection information saved to the camera. You can change device
nicknames (display names) that are displayed on the camera, and erase
connection information.
Advanced Guide
5 Choose an option to edit.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an option to edit,
and then press the <m> button.
zzThe settings you can change depend on
what device or service the camera will
access.
Camera Basics
The following explains the procedure when the target device is a computer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPressing the <o> button will show recent
target devices. To access the Wi-Fi menu,
press the <q><r> buttons.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose a device to edit.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose the icon
of the device to edit, and then press the
<m> button.
Connection
P Mode
Configurable Settings
Web
Services
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
c
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
Playback Mode
–
–
Wi-Fi Functions
O
O
O
Setting Menu
–
O
: Configurable : Not configurable
3 Choose [Edit a Device].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Edit a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
145
Cover
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
Contents: Basic
Operations
to another person, or dispose of it.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab
zzFollowing step 5 in “Editing Connection
Device Nickname] and press the <m>
button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzSelect the input field and press the <m>
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose [Reset Settings].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Reset Settings],
and then press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzFollowing step 5 in “Editing Connection
Connection Info] and press the <m>
button.
Playback Mode
3 Restore the default settings.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
XXThe Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
Appendix
Index
XXThe connection information will be
erased.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• When returning the Wi-Fi settings to defaults, all Web services set using a
computer will also be erased from the camera. Be sure that you want to reset
all Wi-Fi settings before using this option. To clear the settings completed in
connect your camera to the computer and use CameraWindow to erase the
connection information.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
• To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] in the
[3] tab.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
147
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
9
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting Menu
Using GPS
Function
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Adjusting Basic Camera
Functions...............................149
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
Cover
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Functions can be configured on the [3] tab. Customize commonly used
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzChoose [Volume], and then press the
<m> button.
Basic Guide
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
zzChoose an item, and then press the
<q><r> buttons to adjust the volume.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzChoose [Mute], and then choose [On].
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. menu
information.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• Operation can also be silenced by holding down the <l> button as you
turn the camera on.
restore sound during movies, press the <o> button. Adjust volume with the
<o><p> buttons, as needed.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzChoose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
149
Cover
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
2 Switch to the destination time
zone.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [ World], and then
press the <n> button.
XX[ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzChoose [Date/Time], and then press the
<m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an
item, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the <o><p> buttons or
turning the <5> dial.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
update your [
Home] time and date.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
SX280 HS
World Clock
Activating GPS Features or Logging
GPS features and logging can be activated as follows. For instructions after
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you
travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that
time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/
Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzChoose [GPS Settings], and then press
the <m> button.
zzTo activate GPS features, choose [GPS],
and then choose [On].
Playback Mode
1 Specify your destination.
zzChoose [Time Zone], and then press the
<m> button.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [ World], and then
press the <m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose the destination.
zzTo set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), press the <o><p> buttons to
choose [ ].
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTo activate logging, first activate GPS as
described above, choose [GPS Logger],
and then choose [On].
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
zzWhen you press the <n> button,
a message about GPS and logging is
displayed. Press the <m> button after
reading the message.
Appendix
Index
zzPress the <m> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
Cover
2 Shoot.
Lens Retraction Timing
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
zzTo activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
[0 sec.].
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Power-Saving Adjustment
zzChoose [Lens Retract], and then choose
[0 sec.].
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
zzChoose [Power Saving], and then press
the <m> button.
zzAfter choosing an item, press the
<q><r> buttons to adjust it as needed.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Using Eco Mode
P Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When
the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery
consumption.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
Playback Mode
1 Configure the setting.
zzChoose [Eco Mode], and then choose
[On].
Wi-Fi Functions
• The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off].
• These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode
Setting Menu
9
10
11
XX[ ] is now shown on the shooting
Accessories
XXThe screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
151
Cover
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them
up.
zzChoose [LCD Brightness], and then
Basic Guide
press the <q><r> buttons to adjust the
brightness.
Advanced Guide
SX270 HS
formatting an Eye-Fi card, install the software on a computer.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
1 Access the [Format] screen.
zzChoose [Format], and then press the
<m> button.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
• For maximum brightness, press and hold the <l> button for at least
two seconds when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image
display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [3] tab.) To
restore the original brightness, press and hold the <l> button again for at
least two seconds or restart the camera.
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose [OK].
P Mode
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <5> dial),
and then press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Hiding the Start-up Screen
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally
Playback Mode
shown when you turn the camera on.
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Format the memory card.
zzTo begin the formatting process, press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <5>
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
<m> button.
zzWhen formatting is finished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the <m> button.
zzChoose [Start-up Image], and then
Setting Menu
9
10
11
choose [Off].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
Cover
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take
steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically
destroying cards.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
zzChoose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Advanced Guide
• The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than
the advertised capacity.
Camera Basics
Images are numbered
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if
Continuous
Using GPS
Function
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in these cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is
slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops.
Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level
formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other
steps to back them up.
you switch memory cards.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image numbering is reset to
0001 if you switch memory
Auto Reset
Other Shooting
Modes
cards, or when a new folder is
created.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered
consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted
memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted
structure and image formats.
zzOn the screen in step 1 of “Formatting
<o><p> buttons or turn the <5> dial
to choose [Low Level Format], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to select this
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
formatting process.
Accessories
Appendix
because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card.
• You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this
case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
153
Cover
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
Checking Certification Logos
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed
on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the
camera packaging, or on the camera body.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Basic Guide
zzChoose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
zzChoose [Certification Logo Display], and
then press the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
XXImages will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Metric/Non-Metric Display
Other Shooting
Modes
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzChoose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
zzChoose [Language ], and then press
the <m> button.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <5> dial to choose a language,
and then press the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
• You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and
holding the <m> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.
SX280 HS
• Changing [Units] will also change the unit of measurement shown in GPS
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
Cover
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [3] tab.
Restoring Defaults
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
settings.
•
•
SX280 HS
Basic Guide
zzChoose [Reset All], and then press the
<m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
•
•
Advanced Guide
Settings]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
•
•
SX270 HS
XXDefault settings are now restored.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
• The following functions are not restored to default settings.
Other Shooting
Modes
)
P Mode
)
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
)
SX280 HS
Playback Mode
)
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
155
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
10
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Accessories
Using GPS
Function
Use included accessories effectively and enjoy
the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Optional Accessories.............157
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Using Optional
Accessories...........................158
Accessories
Printing Images ......................162
Using an Eye-Fi Card.............170
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
Cover
Flash Unit
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
zzExternal flash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in flash.
Basic Guide
Power Supplies
Advanced Guide
Battery Pack NB-6L
Other Accessories
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzRechargeable lithium-ion battery
Using GPS
Function
Waterproof Case WP-DC49
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
zzFor underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzCharger for Battery Pack NB-6L
Other Shooting
Modes
• The battery includes a convenient cover which you can attach to know the
charging status at a glance. Attach the cover so that is visible on a charged
battery, and attach it so that is not visible on an uncharged battery.
P Mode
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40
zzConnect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
Playback Mode
zzFor powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the camera battery.
Wi-Fi Functions
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzFor connecting the camera to an HDMI
input of a high-definition TV.
Accessories
Appendix
• The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
• For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available
adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed
for traveling, which may damage the battery.
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
Index
zzFor connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
157
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Movies
Printers
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Using Optional Accessories
Contents: Basic
Operations
Canon-brand PictBridge-
Compatible Printers
Still Images
Playback on a TV
Basic Guide
zzPrinting images without a computer is
possible by connecting the camera to
a Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible
printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
dealer.
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
Advanced Guide
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting
Modes
Playback on a High-Definition TV
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.
Movies shot at a resolution of [ ] or [ ] can be viewed in high definition.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
1 Make sure the camera and TV
Playback Mode
are off.
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
Cover
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an
HDTV.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote
Advanced Guide
Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback
(including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control.
In this case, you will need to adjust some TV settings. For details, refer to
the TV manual.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 Turn the TV on and switch to
video input.
zzSwitch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Ctrl via HDMI] on the [3] tab, and then
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Playback on a
the camera to the TV.
Other Shooting
Modes
4 Turn the camera on.
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
XXImages from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
zzWhen finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
Playback Mode
3 Display images.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTurn on the TV. On the camera, press the
<1> button.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
XXImages from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
SX280 HS
Accessories
• It is not possible to connect the included interface cable or an
optional stereo AV cable at the same time as an HDMI Cable
HTC-100. Forcing the cables into the camera at the same time may
damage the camera or cables.
Appendix
Index
SX270 HS
• It is not possible to connect the USB cable or an optional stereo AV
cable at the same time as an HDMI Cable HTC-100. Forcing the
cables into the camera at the same time may damage the camera
or cables.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
159
Cover
4 Control the camera with the TV
remote.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Movies
zzPress the <q><r> buttons on the remote
Contents: Basic
Operations
Playback on a Standard-Definition TV
to browse images.
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the
TV as you control the camera.
zzTo display the camera control panel,
press the OK/Select button. Select
control panel items by pressing the
<q><r> buttons to choose an item, and
then pressing the OK/Select button again.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Make sure the camera and TV
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
are off.
Using GPS
Function
White
Red
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
Yellow
Yellow
Camera Control Panel Options Shown on the TV
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Return
Closes the menu.
the video inputs as shown.
Other Shooting
Modes
]
Red
White
Group Playback
P Mode
is selected.)
Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie
is selected.)
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Play Movie
Slideshow
Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during
playback, press the <q><r> buttons on the remote
control.
Playback Mode
.
Wi-Fi Functions
Index Playback
Change Display
Displays multiple images in an index.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
l
Accessories
• Pressing the <n> button on the camera will switch control to the camera
itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to single-image display.
• Moving the zoom lever on the camera will switch control to the camera itself,
which will prevent remote control until you return to single-image display.
• The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an
HDMI CEC-compatible TV.
3 Display images.
Appendix
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
images.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
Cover
3 Connect the adapter to the
coupler.
zzOpen the cover and insert the adapter
plug fully into the coupler.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
• Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the <n> button and choose [Video
System] on the [3] tab.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
• When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing
shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when
Advanced Guide
4 Connect the power cord.
zzInsert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Still Images
Movies
zzTurn the camera on and use it as desired.
zzWhen finished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 (sold separately)
Other Shooting
Modes
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
• Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
• Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so
could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
P Mode
1 Make sure the camera is off.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
2 Insert the coupler.
zzFollow step 2 in “Inserting the Battery
cover.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzInsert the coupler facing the direction
Setting Menu
9
10
11
shown, just as you would a battery
Terminals
(following step 3 in “Inserting the Battery
zzFollow step 5 in “Inserting the Battery
cover.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
Cover
Still Images
Movies
2 Connect the camera to the
printer.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Printing Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
zzOpen the cover. Holding the smaller
cable plug in the orientation shown, insert
the plug fully into the camera terminal.
zzConnect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On
the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders
for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for
photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Still Images
Easy Print
SX280 HS
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
3 Turn the printer on.
P Mode
SX270 HS
4 Turn the camera on.
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Playback Mode
1 Make sure the camera and
5 Choose an image.
printer are off.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
6 Access the printing screen.
Accessories
m
zzPress the < > button, choose [c], and
Appendix
press the < > button again.
m
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
Cover
Still Images
7 Print the image.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Configuring Print Settings
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [Print], and then
press the <m> button.
Contents: Basic
Operations
1 Access the printing screen.
zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
Basic Guide
XXPrinting now begins.
zzTo print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is finished.
Advanced Guide
2 Configure the settings.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <5> dial to choose an item, and
then choose an option by pressing the
<q><r> buttons.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzWhen you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Default
Date
Matches current printer settings.
Prints images with the date added.
Prints images with the file number added.
Prints images with both the date and file number added.
–
• For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see
Other Shooting
Modes
File No.
Both
P Mode
Off
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Default
Off
Matches current printer settings.
–
Playback Mode
Uses information from the time of shooting to print under
optimal settings.
On
Wi-Fi Functions
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.
Accessories
–
Cropping
Paper
Settings
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
Appendix
–
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
163
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Cropping Images Before Printing (Cropping)
Choosing Paper Size and Layout Before Printing
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1 Choose [Paper Settings].
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Choose [Cropping].
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
<m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose a paper size.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
XXA cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom lever
or turn the <5> dial.
zzTo move the frame, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
zzTo rotate the frame, press the <l>
button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
3 Choose a type of paper.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
3zzWPrhienntfitnhisehiemd,apgrees.s the <m> button.
to print.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
• Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with
[Date Stamp
] selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
Cover
4 Choose a layout.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an option.
zzWhen choosing [N-up], press the
<q><r> buttons to specify the number of
images per sheet.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Printing ID Photos
1 Choose [ID Photo].
Basic Guide
zzFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout Before Printing”
press the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <m> button.
Camera Basics
5 Print the image.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose the long and short side
length.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an item. Choose the
length by pressing the <q><r> buttons,
and then press the <m> button.
Using GPS
Function
Available Layout Options
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Default
Matches current printer settings.
Bordered
Borderless
N-up
Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
Other Shooting
Modes
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
P Mode
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of
4:3.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
3 Choose the printing area.
zzFollow step 2 in “Cropping Images Before
the printing area.
ID Photo
Playback Mode
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Fixed Size
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
4 Print the image.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
165
Cover
Movies
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Printing Movie Scenes
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Contents: Basic
Operations
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies,
as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
1 Access the printing screen.
zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
at left is displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2 Choose a printing method.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <5> dial to choose [ ], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to choose the
printing method.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Still Images
Using GPS
Function
Configuring Print Settings
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Print the image.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [2] tab.
Choose and configure settings as desired
Movie Printing Options
P Mode
Single
Prints the current scene as a still image.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of
paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed
time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On].
Sequence
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• To cancel printing in progress, press the <m> button.
• [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models.
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Print Type
Index
Both
On
Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet.
Both standard and index formats are printed.
Images are printed with the shooting date.
–
Accessories
Date
Appendix
Off
On
Images are printed with the file number.
Index
File No.
–
Off
On
All image print list settings are cleared after printing.
–
Clear DPOF
data
Off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
• Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
• [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all
previous settings.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [2] tab,
and then press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date
twice.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
• Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File
No.] at the same time.
• Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible
printers (sold separately).
• The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
XXYou can now specify the number of
copies.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzIf you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press the
<m> button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
3 Specify the number of prints.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to specify the number of prints
(up to 99).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
zzTo set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
Appendix
zzPrinting quantity cannot be specified for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
zzWhen finished, press the <n> button
to return to the menu screen.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
167
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Still Images
Contents: Basic
Operations
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Clearing All Images from the Print List
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
[Select Range] and press the <m>
button.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the <m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Setting Up Printing for All Images
P Mode
zzWhen images have been added to the
at left is displayed after you connect
the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer. Press the <o><p> buttons to
choose [Print now], and then simply press
the <m> button to print the images in the
print list.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
[Select All Images] and press the <m>
button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzAny DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
Cover
Still Images
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Adding Images to a Photobook
Contents: Basic
Operations
Adding Images Individually
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering
printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer.
1 Choose [Select].
Basic Guide
[Select] and press the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
Choosing a Selection Method
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [1] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
XX[ ] is displayed.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all
previous settings.
zzTo remove the image from the photobook,
press the <m> button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
Playback Mode
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
Wi-Fi Functions
• After importing images to your computer, also refer to the Software Guide
zzWhen finished, press the <n> button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
169
Cover
SX270 HS
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Using an Eye-Fi Card
Contents: Basic
Operations
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Before using an Eye-Fi card, always confirm that local use is permitted
[Select All Images] and press the <m>
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Inserting a prepared Eye-Fi card enables automatic wireless transfer of
images to a computer or uploading to a photo-sharing website.
Images are transferred by the Eye-Fi card. Refer to the card’s user manual
or contact the manufacturer for instructions on preparing and using cards or
resolving transfer problems.
Camera Basics
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
• When using an Eye-Fi card, keep the following points in mind.
- Cards may continue to transmit radio waves even when [Eye-Fi
entering hospitals, aircraft, or other areas where transmission is
prohibited.
- When troubleshooting image transfer issues, check the card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s user manual.
- Poor Eye-Fi connections may cause image transfer to take a long
time, and transfer may be interrupted in some cases.
- Eye-Fi cards may become hot, due to their transfer functions.
- Battery power will be consumed faster than in normal use.
- Camera operation may become sluggish. To resolve this, try
setting [Eye-Fi trans.] to [Disable].
Other Shooting
Modes
Removing All Images from a Photobook
P Mode
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>
button.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<5> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
Cover
Disabling Eye-Fi Transfer
Configure the setting as follows to disable Eye-Fi transfer by the card, if
Connection status of Eye-Fi cards in the camera can be checked on the
shooting screen (in regular information display mode) or playback screen (in
simple information display mode).
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
necessary.
(Gray)
Not connected
Interrupted
Basic Guide
(Blinking white) Connecting
Not communicating
Choose [Disable] in [Eye-Fi trans.].
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Eye-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab, and then
press the <m> button.
zzChoose [Eye-Fi trans.], and then choose
[Disable].
Error acquiring Eye-Fi card
information*2
(White)
Connected
Advanced Guide
(Animated)
Transfer in progress*1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
*2Restart the camera. Repeated display of this icon may indicate a problem with the
card.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Images labeled with a [ ] icon have been transferred.
• [Eye-Fi Settings] is not shown unless an Eye-Fi card is in the
camera with its write-protect tab in the unlocked position. For this
reason, you cannot change settings for an inserted Eye-Fi card if
the write-protect tab is in the locked position.
Other Shooting
Modes
• Choosing [ ] mode will interrupt the Eye-Fi connection. Although the Eye-Fi
connection will be restored after you choose another shooting mode or enter
Playback mode, the camera may transfer any movies made in [ ] mode
again.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Checking Connection Information
Check the access point SSID used by the Eye-Fi card or the connection
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
status, as needed.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Eye-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab, and then
press the <m> button.
zzChoose [Connection info], and then press
the <m> button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
XXThe connection information screen is
displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
171
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
11
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Appendix
Using GPS
Function
Helpful information when using the camera
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
4
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Troubleshooting.....................173
On-Screen Messages.............176
On-Screen Information ..........179
Functions and Menu Tables..181
Handling Precautions ............189
Specifications.........................190
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
Cover
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
• The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED
lighting.
Basic Guide
Power
No date stamp is added to images.
Advanced Guide
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
• Configure the [Date Stamp
added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/Time]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a
cotton swab and reinserting the battery a few times.
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
[h] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and
The battery is depleted quickly.
Other Shooting
Modes
• Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery a little
by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch any
metal objects.
[
• Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, you
P Mode
• If these measures do not help and the battery is still depleted soon after charging, it
has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
The lens is not retracted.
• Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover,
Playback Mode
Shots are out of focus.
• Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way
Wi-Fi Functions
The battery is swollen.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
• Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if battery
swelling prevents the battery from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Accessories
• Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
Appendix
Display on a TV
Index
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
• To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button
halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
173
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting
is slower.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
• Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each
Basic Guide
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
Advanced Guide
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
• The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
• Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
• Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
• Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-
speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length
191).
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
• Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output
[
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
Playback Mode
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the
memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
Wi-Fi Functions
White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots.
• This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Zooming is not possible.
Shots look grainy.
Appendix
Subjects look distorted.
• Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range.
Index
The screen looks dark, or recorded movies look dark.
look darker at [
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Playback
SX280 HS
Playback is not possible.
Wi-Fi
Contents: Basic
Operations
• Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or
folder structure and file names.
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the <o> button.
• The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try
again.
Basic Guide
Playback stops, or audio skips.
• Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
• There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that
have slow read speeds.
• In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during detailed information
display, magnified display, or index display. Switch to single-image display and a
viewing mode other than detailed information display. Similarly, the Wi-Fi menu
cannot be accessed during filtered image display according to specified conditions.
Cancel the playback state of the image in image search mode.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
• The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
• When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip
if computer performance is inadequate.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Cannot add a device/destination.
Sound is not played during movies.
the movie is faint.
Other Shooting
Modes
• A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new devices/
• To add Web services to send images to, install CameraWindow and complete the
• To add a smartphone as a device, first install the dedicated application
• To add a computer as a device, first install the software CameraWindow on the
135).
P Mode
recorded in this mode.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
• Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave
ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
Accessories
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Appendix
• Press the <1> button to enter Playback mode. Hold the <n> button down as
m
you press the <o> and < > buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press
Cannot send images.
• The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on
Index
the <q><r> buttons to choose [B], and then press the <m> button.
the destination device and resend the images.
SX270 HS
• The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
Eye-Fi Cards
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
175
Cover
On-Screen Messages
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Cannot resize images for sending.
• Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size.
• Movies cannot be resized.
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Contents: Basic
Operations
No memory card
Images take a long time to send./The Wi-Fi connection is disrupted.
• Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or [
• The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card
Basic Guide
]
Advanced Guide
Memory card locked
• The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
• Movies may take a long time to send.
• Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave
ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. Note
that images may take a long time to send even when [ ] is displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Cannot record!
• Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
• When sending images to a computer from a memory card with a large amount
of images (approximately 1,000), the connection may be disrupted. Import any
necessary images to a computer, and then reduce the number of images on the
memory card by erasing unnecessary images.
• If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported
a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Insufficient space on card
•
–
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
No Image.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
• The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Accessories
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play
back MOV
• Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
Appendix
Index
• It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer,
or images shot with another camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/
Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to
category/Unselectable image./No identification information
• The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already
edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*)
functions are not available for movies.
Lens Error
• This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used
in dusty or sandy locations.
Contents: Basic
Operations
• Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Basic Guide
A camera error was detected (error number)
• If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have
been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,
write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Using GPS
Function
Invalid selection range
choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
File Error
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Other Shooting
Modes
Exceeded selection limit
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
P Mode
Print error
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again.
Playback Mode
Ink absorber full
• Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Communication error
Wi-Fi Functions
• An excessive amount of images (approx. 1,000) on the memory card prevented
printing or image transfer to a computer. To transfer the images, use a commercially
available USB card reader. To print, insert the memory card directly into the printer
card slot.
Setting Menu
SX280 HS
9
10
11
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
• A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
Accessories
Naming error!
Appendix
• The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest
supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and
the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached.
Index
connection.
• Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
177
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Cannot determine access point
• The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
Contents: Basic
Operations
• When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have
been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
No access points found
• Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
Basic Guide
Insufficient space on server
• Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space.
• When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Incorrect Wi-Fi encryption key/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
SSL certificate not valid
Connect to a computer, use the supplied software to reset
• Check to make sure the date/time settings on the camera are correct. After confirming
that the settings are correct, follow the on-screen instructions and reset the settings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
IP address conflict
• Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Check network settings
• Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
• You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
Other Shooting
Modes
• Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices,
and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
• Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Playback Mode
Sending failed
Memory card error
• If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
• There is not enough free space on the memory card to receive images. Erase images
to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card with sufficient space.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
• The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
Cover
Blink detection
Date stamp
MF indicator
On-Screen Information
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Exposure shift bar
Exposure
compensation level
Shooting (Information Display)
SX280 HS
GPS reception
SX270 HS
Eye-Fi connection
Spot AE point frame
Contents: Basic
Operations
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Red-eye correction
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Image stabilization
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
P Mode
Display
Details
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Sufficient charge
Playback Mode
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
Shooting mode
Scene icon
Flash mode
Flash exposure
compensation /
Flash output level
Metering method
White balance
Camera shake
Recordable shots
Movie quality
Remaining time
Digital zoom
magnification
tele-converter
Nearly depleted—charge the battery soon
Depleted—charge the battery immediately
Wi-Fi Functions
(Blinking red)
)
[Charge the battery]
Setting Menu
9
10
11
)
Accessories
)
Appendix
Index
Still image
compression
Focusing range
Drive mode
179
Cover
101), Sports
speed burst HQ
Still image
compression
time (movies)
Resolution
File size
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
• Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Exit
Using GPS
Function
Play
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <5> dial. No sound is played.)
Current image no. /
Total no. of images
Shooting mode
Battery level
SX280 HS
Wi-Fi signal strength
Folder number - File
Shooting date/time
Flash exposure
compensation /
Flash output level
Other Shooting
Modes
keep holding down the <m> button.)
P Mode
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the <m> button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the <m> button.)
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Metering method
)
Shutter speed (still
98), Image quality
/ Frame rate
White balance
White balance
119)
120)
Red-eye correction
Focusing range
Playback Mode
holding down the <m> button.)
Wi-Fi Functions
*
c
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer
Setting Menu
Aperture value
Movie quality
9
10
11
SX280 HS
Images have been
saved on a computer
SX270 HS
Transferred via Eye-Fi
Image editing
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
Accessories
Appendix
• During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or
next chapter) by pressing the <q><r> buttons.
Exposure
compensation level
Playback speed
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
Cover
Functions and Menu Tables
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Contents: Basic
Operations
Shooting Mode
K
E
Basic Guide
D BM
G
S
t
E
I
P
Advanced Guide
Function
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
Using GPS
Function
][$
Delay*
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Self-Timer Settings
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
Shots*
Other Shooting
Modes
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
h
Z
!
P Mode
3
3
3
–
*
*
*
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Playback Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
Wi-Fi Functions
4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Setting Menu
9
10
11
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
Accessories
e
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Appendix
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
f
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index
–
*1 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
*2 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*3 Not available, but switches to [Z] in some cases.
*4 FE lock not available in [!] flash mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
181
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
D BM
G
S
t
E
I
P
Contents: Basic
Operations
Function
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide
No Information Display
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
)
Screen Display (=
Information Display
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide
–
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
Cover
FUNC. Menu
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Shooting Mode
K
E
Contents: Basic
Operations
D BM
G
S
t
E
I
P
Function
Basic Guide
SX280 HS
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
P Mode
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
White Balance Correction
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5 – 0 – A5
O
Playback Mode
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Wi-Fi Functions
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Setting Menu
9
10
11
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Accessories
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Appendix
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
W
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
*
–
* [ ] is set with [f], AF lock, or [t].
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
183
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
D BM
G
S
t
E
I
P
Function
Contents: Basic
Operations
Still Image Aspect Ratio
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Using GPS
Function
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
Other Shooting
Modes
2
–
*
–
–
O
P Mode
–
*1 Only [ ] and [ ] are available.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
Cover
4Shooting Menu
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Shooting Mode
K
E
Contents: Basic
Operations
D BM
G
S
t
E
I
P
Function
Face AiAF*
Basic Guide
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
Advanced Guide
Tracking AF
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
Center
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
Using GPS
Function
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Normal
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Small
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
Standard
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
Other Shooting
Modes
Off
1.5x/2.0x
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Playback Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
3
Wi-Fi Functions
Off
O
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Setting Menu
9
10
11
–
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
Off
O
Accessories
–
–
–
–
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix
Off
O
O
O
O
Index
–
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center].
*3 [On] when subject movement is detected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
185
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
D BM
G
S
t
E
I
P
Function
Contents: Basic
Operations
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Flash Mode
Manual
O
–
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Flash Exp. Comp
Flash Output
O
–
Other Shooting
Modes
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
Red-Eye Corr.
Off
On
Off
On
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
P Mode
Red-Eye
Lamp
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
O
O
–
Safety FE
Playback Mode
O
Wi-Fi Functions
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Setting Menu
9
10
11
On
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
Accessories
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix
Wind Filter
–
–
Auto/Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index
–
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
D BM
G
S
t
E
I
P
Function
Contents: Basic
Operations
Off/Quick/2 sec./4 sec./
8 sec./Hold
Basic Guide
–
–
–
–
Display Time
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Display Info
Off/Detailed
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Camera Basics
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Using GPS
Function
On/Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
O
–
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
Other Shooting
Modes
IS Mode
Continuous
Shoot Only
P Mode
–
Dynamic IS
1
2
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
O
O
Date Stamp
Playback Mode
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
Date / Date & Time
Wi-Fi Functions
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
187
Cover
3Set up Menu
1Playback Menu
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Item
Ref. Page
Item
Ref. Page
Item
Ref. Page
Item
Ref. Page
Contents: Basic
Operations
Mute
Format
Slideshow
Erase
Resize
Volume
File Numbering
Create Folder
Units
My Colors
Basic Guide
Hints & Tips
Date/Time
Time Zone
Protect
Rotate
Face ID Info
Scroll Display
Group Images
Auto Rotate
Resume
Advanced Guide
Video System
Favorites
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SX280 HS
GPS Auto Time
Photobook Set-up
i-Contrast
Ctrl via HDMI
Using GPS
Function
SX280 HS
GPS Settings
SX280 HS
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Red-Eye Correction
Cropping
Transition
Wi-Fi Settings
Other Shooting
Modes
SX270 HS
Lens Retract
Eye-Fi Settings
P Mode
Eco Mode
Certification Logo Display
2Print Menu
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Language
Power Saving
LCD Brightness
Start-up Image
Item
Ref. Page
Item
Select All Images
Clear All Selections
Print Settings
Ref. Page
Reset All
–
Print
Playback Mode
Select Images & Qty.
Select Range
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
Cover
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu
Handling Precautions
The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Item
Ref. Page
Item
Ref. Page
•
•
Contents: Basic
Operations
Rotate
Play Movie
subjecting it to strong impact.
Print List
Protect
List/Play Digest Movies
Smart Shuffle
Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or
erase image data.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Favorites
Image Search
Slideshow
•
•
•
•
If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry
soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force.
Group Playback
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or
screen.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Other Shooting
Modes
To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm
environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and
let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
•
•
If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the
battery and memory card, and wait until the moisture has evaporated
before resuming use.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery’s remaining charge,
remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag or similar
container. Storing a partially charged battery over extended periods
(about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
189
Cover
Specifications
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
SX280 HS
IEEE802.11b/g/n*
* 2.4 GHz band only
Camera Effective
Contents: Basic
Operations
Wi-Fi Standards
Approx. 12.1 million pixels
Pixels (Max.)
Wi-Fi Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
20x zoom: 4.5 (W) – 90.0 (T) mm
(35mm film equivalent: 25 (W) – 500 (T) mm)
Lens Focal Length
Basic Guide
Wi-Fi Communication
Modes
Infrastructure mode*, Ad hoc mode
* Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
3.0 type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 461,000 dots
Advanced Guide
LCD Monitor
File Format
Supported Wi-Fi
Channels
1 – 11 (PC1967) or 1 – 13 (PC1886)
Camera Basics
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1)
compliant
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG)
Wi-Fi Security
Movies: MP4 (video: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
Audio: MPEG-2 AAC LC (stereo)
SX280 HS
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Data Type
Other Shooting
Modes
GPS log files: NMEA 0183 message format compliant
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Analog audio output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Number of Shots
in Eco mode
Movie Recording Time*1
Continuous
Shooting*2
Playback Time
Approx. 210
P Mode
Interface
Approx. 260
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Approx. 25 minutes
Battery Pack NB-6L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40
Playback Mode
Power Source
Approx. 1 hour
Approx. 3 hours, 30 minutes
SX280 HS
Wi-Fi Functions
106.4 x 62.8 x 32.6 mm (4.19 x 2.47 x 1.28 in.)
Dimensions (Based
on CIPA Guidelines)
*1Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed, such as
shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.
*2Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops
automatically) repeatedly.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
SX270 HS
106.4 x 61.1 x 32.6 mm (4.19 x 2.41 x 1.28 in.)
Accessories
SX280 HS
• The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the
Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
Approx. 233 g (approx. 8.22 oz.; including the battery and
memory card)
Approx. 210 g (approx. 7.41 oz.; camera body only)
Appendix
• Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less
than mentioned above.
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Index
SX270 HS
• Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery.
Approx. 227 g (approx. 8.01 oz.; including the battery and
memory card)
Approx. 204 g (approx. 7.20 oz.; camera body only)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card
Recording Time per Memory Card
Number of Shots per Memory Card
(Approx. shots)
Recording Time per Memory Card
Contents: Basic
Operations
Compression
Ratio
Image Quality
Recording Pixels
8 GB
32 GB
8 GB
32 GB
30 min. 03 sec.
2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec.
Basic Guide
1379
5568
(Large)
12M/4000x3000
43 min. 29 sec.
2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec.
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec.
2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.
8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.
21 hr. 10 min. 33 sec.
Advanced Guide
2192
2431
8850
9814
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(Medium 1)
6M/2816x2112
3721
15020
30040
52176
Using GPS
Function
• The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.
7442
(Medium 2)
2M/1600x1200
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
• Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the
recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in
12927
27291
40937
Other Shooting
Modes
110150
165225
[
], [
] or [
], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [
].
(Small)
0.3M/640x480
• Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some
memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.
P Mode
• The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Flash Range
• The values in the table are based on 4:3 aspect ratio. If the aspect ratio is changed
than with 4:3 images. However, since [ ] 16:9 images have a setting of 1920 x 1080
pixels, their data size will be larger than 4:3 images.
Playback Mode
50 cm – 3.5 m (1.6 – 11 ft.)
1.0 – 2.0 m (3.3 – 6.6 ft.)
Maximum wide angle (j)
Maximum telephoto (i)
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
191
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Shooting Range
Shutter Speed
Maximum Wide Angle Maximum Telephoto
[
] mode, automatically set range
1 – 1/3200 sec.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Shooting Mode Focusing Range
(j)
(i)
15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10,
1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250,
1/1600, 1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200
–
–
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 1 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity
Basic Guide
1 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity
6 m (20 ft.) – infinity
[M] mode available values (sec.)
Advanced Guide
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S
1.5 – 20 m
(4.9 – 66 ft.)
1.5 – 20 m
(4.9 – 66 ft.)
8
Using GPS
Function
Aperture
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 1 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity
f/number
f/3.5 – f/8.0 (W), f/6.8 – f/8.0 (T)
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
5 – 50 cm
–
f/3.5, f/4.0, f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/6.8, f/7.1,
f/8.0
Other modes
e*
[B] mode available values*
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
Other Shooting
Modes
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 1 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity
f*
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
P Mode
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Continuous Shooting Speed
Shooting Mode
Playback Mode
Continuous Shooting
Speed
Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Approx. 3.8 shots/sec.
Approx. 1.0 shots/sec.
Approx. 1.0 shots/sec.
Approx. 14 shots/sec.
Approx. 5.1 shots/sec.
W
Setting Menu
G
9
10
11
Accessories
W
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
Cover
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Battery Pack NB-6L
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
3.7 V DC
1000 mAh
Approx. 300 times
Contents: Basic
Operations
Nominal Voltage:
Nominal Capacity:
Charging Cycles:
Basic Guide
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Advanced Guide
Dimensions:
Weight:
34.4 x 41.8 x 6.9 mm (1.35 x 1.65 x 0.27 in.)
Approx. 21 g (approx. 0.74 oz.)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
Using GPS
Function
Rated Input:
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz), 0.085 A (100 V) – 0.05 A (240 V)
Rated Output:
Charging Time:
Charge Indicator:
4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Approx. 1 hr. 55 min. (when using NB-6L)
Charging: orange /
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Fully charged: green (two-indicator system)
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
P Mode
•
•
All data is based on tests by Canon.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Camera specifications or appearance are subject to change without
notice.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
193
Cover
D
F
Index
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Date/time
Face AiAF (AF frame mode)................ 91
Face self-timer (shooting mode).......... 78
FE lock................................................. 94
File numbering................................... 153
Flash
Adding date stamps ...................... 56
Changing....................................... 16
Date/time battery........................... 17
Settings ......................................... 16
World clock.................................. 150
Contents: Basic
Operations
A
C
AC adapter kit............................ 157, 161
Accessories ....................................... 157
Access point
Camera
Adding target devices.................. 133
Nickname .................................... 126
Reset all ...................................... 155
Basic Guide
DC coupler......................................... 161
Defaults Reset all
Advanced Guide
Number of display items.............. 138
CameraWindow
Camera Basics
Adding target devices
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk........... 2
Digital tele-converter............................ 90
Digital zoom......................................... 53
Discreet mode (shooting mode) .......... 69
DPOF................................................. 166
Drive mode .......................................... 88
Camera ....................................... 133
Computer .................................... 135
Printer.......................................... 139
Smartphone................................. 130
Web services............................... 127
Flash exposure compensation ...... 94
On ................................................. 93
Slow synchro................................. 93
Using GPS
Function
Display ........................................ 138
Smartphone................................. 130
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Focusing
Settings ....................................... 127
Center (AF frame mode)...................... 90
Other Shooting
Modes
AE lock ................................................ 84
AF lock................................................. 93
Aspect ratio.......................................... 63
Av (shooting mode) ............................. 97
AV cable .................................... 159, 160
AF frames...................................... 90
AF lock .......................................... 93
AF-point zoom............................... 65
Servo AF ....................................... 92
Clock.................................................... 37
Color (white balance)........................... 86
Compression ratio (image quality)....... 95
Computer
P Mode
E
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Focusing range
Editing
Macro ............................................ 89
Manual focus................................. 89
Cropping.......................................118
i-Contrast..................................... 120
Red-eye correction...................... 120
Resizing images...........................117
Playback Mode
Adding target devices.................. 135
Preparation.................................. 134
Focus lock ........................................... 90
FUNC. menu
Wi-Fi Functions
Connection
B
Batteries Date/time (Date/time battery)
Battery
Basic operations............................ 34
Setting Menu
Web services............................... 129
Connection information
9
10
11
Erasing ...............................................113
Error messages ................................. 176
Exposure
Accessories
Changing nickname .................... 146
Editing ......................................... 145
G
Charging........................................ 13
Level............................................ 179
Power saving................................. 32
Grid lines ............................................. 65
FE lock .......................................... 94
Appendix
Continuous shooting............................ 88
High-speed burst HQ
(shooting mode) ............................ 79
Index
Black and white images....................... 87
Eye-Fi cards .................................. 2, 170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Cover
Menu
Basic operations............................ 35
Smartphone
Adding target devices.................. 130
H
R
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode)................................... 71
Reset all............................................. 155
Resetting Wi-Fi settings..................... 146
CameraWindow........................... 130
Contents: Basic
Operations
Metering method.................................. 84
High-speed burst HQ
(shooting mode)................................... 79
Monochrome (shooting mode)............. 76
Movies
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) ........... 77
Smile (shooting mode)......................... 77
Snow (shooting mode)......................... 71
Soft focus (shooting mode).................. 76
Software
Basic Guide
Household power............................... 161
Advanced Guide
Editing ......................................... 121
Image quality
(resolution/frame rate)................... 64
I
Camera Basics
S
Screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Image quality Compression ratio
DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk .... 2
Saving images to a computer.. 24, 28
(image quality)
Display language........................... 17
Icons.................................... 179, 180
Menu FUNC. menu, Menu
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Images
N
Display period ............................... 67
Playback Viewing
Other Shooting
Modes
Nickname
Sounds .............................................. 149
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
Camera ....................................... 126
Device ......................................... 146
Memory cards
P Mode
Searching .......................................... 105
Self-timer ............................................. 54
Indicator............................................... 36
ISO speed............................................ 85
Super slow motion movie
(movie mode)....................................... 81
P
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
P (shooting mode) ............................... 83
Photobook set-up .............................. 169
PictBridge .................................. 158, 162
Playback Viewing
2-second self-timer........................ 55
Customizing the self-timer............. 55
Face self-timer (shooting mode) ... 78
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) ... 77
Super vivid (shooting mode)................ 73
Playback Mode
T
L
Wi-Fi Functions
Tracking AF ......................................... 91
Traveling with the camera ................. 150
Tv (shooting mode).............................. 97
TV display.......................................... 158
Lamp.................................................... 66
Live View Control (shooting mode)...... 69
Sending images................................. 141
Maximum number of images
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Poster effect (shooting mode) ............. 74
that can be sent together ............ 141
Resizing images.......................... 142
Sending individually .................... 141
M
Accessories
Power AC adapter kit
Battery
M (shooting mode)............................... 98
MAC address..................................... 134
Macro (focus mode)............................. 89
Appendix
Sepia tone images............................... 87
Servo AF.............................................. 92
Shooting
Battery charger
Index
Printing .............................................. 162
U
Shooting date/time Date/time
Shooting information ................... 179
Memory cards................................ 2, 127
195
Cover
V
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
Image search .............................. 105
Index display ............................... 105
Slideshow.................................... 109
TV display ................................... 158
Contents: Basic
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
W
Using GPS
Function
Web services
Adding target devices.................. 127
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
White balance (color)........................... 86
Wi-Fi .................................................. 123
P Mode
Access point................................ 134
Settings ....................................... 134
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
Windows
CameraWindow display .............. 138
Settings ....................................... 135
Playback Mode
Wink self-timer (shooting mode).......... 77
WPS
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
PBC Method................................ 136
PIN Method ................................. 137
Accessories
Wrist strap Strap
Appendix
Z
Zoom ....................................... 18, 47, 53
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
Cover
CAUTION
FCC Notice
(Digital Camera, Model PC1967 systems)
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions;
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Contents: Basic
Operations
Battery Charger CB-2LY
Basic Guide
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the
proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
Advanced Guide
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class
B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
USA and Canada only:
The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable.
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this
battery.
P Mode
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
SX280 HS
Playback Mode
This Category II radiocommunication device complies with Industry Canada Standard
RSS-310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Wi-Fi Functions
The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used with this
equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC
rules.
Setting Menu
9
10
11
Accessories
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could
be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Complies with
IDA Standards
DB00671
Appendix
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
Index
This product is installed with the WLAN Module which is certified to standards set by
One Canon Park, Melville, New York 11747, U.S.A.
Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)
IDA Singapore.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
197
Cover
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
Disclaimer
Preliminary Notes
and Legal Information
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B)
•
•
•
•
Reprinting, transmitting, or storing in a retrieval system any part of this
guide without the permission of Canon is prohibited.
Contents: Basic
Operations
To ensure proper operation of this product, use of genuine Canon
accessories is recommended.
Canon reserves the right to change the contents of this guide at any time
without prior notice.
Basic Guide
For CA, USA only
Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
Advanced Guide
Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
The above items notwithstanding, Canon accepts no liability for damages
due to mistaken operation of the products.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using GPS
Function
Trademark Acknowledgments
SX280 HS
•
•
•
The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
FCC/IC Notice
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
Model: PC1967 (including WLAN Module Model WM217, FCC ID: AZD217)
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are
associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that
these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices
emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being
used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),
exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known
adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any
biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might
occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. This model
has been tested and found to comply with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth
for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules.
Other Shooting
Modes
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
•
Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
P Mode
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Tv, Av, and M
Mode
About MPEG-4 Licensing
Playback Mode
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T
patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
9
10
11
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Accessories
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Appendix
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
|